WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do
not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may
also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and
equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make
additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution
therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Radio Instruction
Manual and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time. The Roadside Assistance Program is subject to restrictions and
conditions of use, that are determined solely by FCA US LLC.
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
24 HOURS, 7 DAYS A WEEK AT YOUR SERVICE.
CALL 1-800-521-2779 OR VISIT CHRYSLER.RSAHELP.COM (USA)
CALL 1-800-363-4869 OR VISIT FCA.ROADSIDEAID.COM (CANADA)
SERVICES: Flat Tire Service, Out Of Gas/Fuel Delivery, Battery Jump Assistance, Lockout Service and Towing Service
Please see the Customer Assistance chapter in this Owner’s Manual for further information.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................................................7
2GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................13
3GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................................66
4STARTING AND OPERATING ................................................................................................90
5MULTIMEDIA ...............................................................................................................................144
6SAFETY .........................................................................................................................................165
7IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .....................................................................................................213
8SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................233
9TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................................281
10CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................286
11INDEX..............................................................................................................................................291
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
SYMBOLS KEY ....................................................................... 8
ROLLOVER WARNING .........................................................8
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ......................... 8
SYMBOL GLOSSARY............................................................. 9
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ....................................................................................13
Key Fobs ..................................................................... 13
SENTRY KEY ........................................................................15
IGNITION SWITCH ...............................................................16
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition .................................... 16
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED ......................................17
How To Use Remote Start .......................................... 17
To Exit Remote Start Mode ....................................... 18
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped .................................................................. 18
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped ......... 18
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer Activation —
If Equipped .................................................................. 19
Remote Start Abort Message —
If Equipped .................................................................. 19
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM..............................................19
To Arm The System .................................................... 19
To Disarm The System ............................................... 20
Rearming Of The System............................................ 20
Security System Manual Override.............................. 20
DOORS .................................................................................20
Manual Door Locks......................................................20
Power Door Locks........................................................21
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry .......................21
Automatic Door Locks —
If Equipped...................................................................23
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit ................................23
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors.....23
STEERING WHEEL ..............................................................24
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ..............................24
Heated Steering Wheel —
If Equipped ..................................................................24
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED ................25
Programming The Memory Feature............................25
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Key Fob To Memory ...........................................25
Memory Position Recall...............................................26
SEATS................................................................................... 26
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped.......26
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) ...............................27
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped.........28
Heated Seats — If Equipped........................................29
Front Ventilated Seats —
If Equipped...................................................................30
Head Restraints...........................................................30
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS — IF EQUIPPED .......................................................... 32
Introducing Voice Recognition.................................... 32
Basic Voice Commands .............................................. 32
Get Started .................................................................. 32
Additional Information ................................................ 32
MIRRORS ............................................................................ 33
Inside Rearview Mirror................................................ 33
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors........................................... 33
Outside Mirrors ........................................................... 34
Outside Mirrors With Turn
Signal — If Equipped.................................................... 34
Power Adjustment Mirrors .......................................... 34
Folding Mirrors ............................................................ 34
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped..................................... 35
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER (HOMELINK®) —
IF EQUIPPED
b
................................................................. 35
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® ............ 35
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ....................... 35
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Code Or
Non-Rolling Code Device............................................. 35
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener ......................................................................... 36
Programming HomeLink® To A Miscellaneous
Device .......................................................................... 36
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button........... 37
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .................... 37
Security ........................................................................ 38
Troubleshooting Tips................................................... 38
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ..............................................................38
Multifunction Lever .................................................... 38
Headlight Switch ......................................................... 38
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) —
If Equipped .................................................................. 39
High/Low Beam Switch ............................................. 39
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
If Equipped .................................................................. 39
Flash-To-Pass .............................................................. 39
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ......................... 40
Headlight Time Delay.................................................. 40
Lights-On Reminder .................................................... 40
Fog Lights — If Equipped ............................................ 40
Turn Signals ................................................................ 41
Lane Change Assist ................................................... 41
Battery Saver Feature................................................. 41
INTERIOR LIGHTS ...............................................................41
Interior Courtesy Lights............................................... 41
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ...........................43
Windshield Wiper Operation....................................... 43
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped .......................... 44
Rear Window Wiper/Washer ..................................... 44
Windshield Wiper De-Icer —
If Equipped .................................................................. 45
CLIMATE CONTROLS .........................................................45
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions..................................................................... 45
Manual Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions..................................................................... 48
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ...................... 50
Climate Voice Commands .......................................... 50
Operating Tips ............................................................ 50
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT............................52
Storage .........................................................................52
USB Control..................................................................52
Power Outlets — If Equipped.......................................53
Wireless Charging Pad —
If Equipped...................................................................54
WINDOWS ..........................................................................56
Power Window Controls...............................................56
Automatic Window Features ......................................56
Reset Auto-Up ..............................................................56
Window Lockout Switch ..............................................57
Wind Buffeting ............................................................57
POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE —
IF EQUIPPED ....................................................................... 57
Opening And Closing The Sunroof..............................58
Venting Sunroof ...........................................................58
Opening And Closing The Power Sunshade...............58
Pinch Protect Feature..................................................59
Sunroof Maintenance..................................................59
HOOD....................................................................................59
Opening The Hood .......................................................59
Closing The Hood.........................................................59
LIFTGATE.............................................................................. 60
Unlock/Open The Liftgate ..........................................60
Lock/Close The Liftgate ..............................................60
Power Liftgate — If Equipped ......................................60
Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped ............................61
Cargo Area Features....................................................62
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ..........................65
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ....................... 66
Base / Midline Instrument Cluster Descriptions....... 68
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER................................... 69
Premium Instrument Cluster Descriptions ................ 70
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY..................................... 70
Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls ... 70
Oil Change Reset......................................................... 73
Display And Messages — If Equipped ........................ 73
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ................... 74
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions —
If Equipped................................................................... 80
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ................................ 81
Red Warning Lights..................................................... 81
Yellow Warning Lights ................................................. 83
Yellow Indicator Lights ................................................ 86
Green Indicator Lights................................................. 87
White Indicator Lights ................................................. 88
Blue Indicator Lights ................................................... 88
Gray Indicator Lights ................................................... 88
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II .................... 88
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ............................................................... 89
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS......................................................................... 89
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE ......................................................90
Normal Starting........................................................... 90
Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) .......................................... 91
Extended Park Starting............................................... 91
After Starting — Warming Up The Engine .................. 91
If Engine Fails To Start ............................................... 91
Stopping The Engine................................................... 92
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS .......................92
PARK BRAKE.......................................................................92
Electric Park Brake (EPB) .......................................... 92
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION.............................................95
Ignition Park Interlock................................................. 96
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
System ......................................................................... 96
8-Speed Automatic Transmission ............................. 96
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION —
IF EQUIPPED..................................................................... 100
Jeep® Active Drive.................................................... 100
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED .................................... 101
Mode Selection Guide .............................................. 101
POWER STEERING........................................................... 101
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED.......................... 102
Autostop Mode.......................................................... 102
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop..................................................................... 102
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode.......... 103
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System ......... 103
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System.......... 103
System Malfunction.................................................. 103
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED ............. 104
Cruise Control ........................................................... 104
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC).................................. 105
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED..................................................................... 113
Activation/Deactivation............................................ 113
Traffic Sign Assist Modes ......................................... 113
Indications On The Display....................................... 113
HIGHWAY ASSIST SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ................. 114
Operation................................................................... 114
Turning Highway Assist On Or Off ............................ 115
Indications On The Display....................................... 116
System Status........................................................... 117
System Operation/Limitations................................. 117
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ................................................ 118
ParkSense Sensors .................................................. 118
ParkSense Warning Display..................................... 118
ParkSense Display.................................................... 118
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ......................... 121
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System............ 121
Cleaning The ParkSense System............................. 121
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ................... 121
Side Distance Warning (SDW) System .................... 122
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ................................................. 124
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active
Park Assist System ................................................... 124
Parallel/Perpendicular Parking Space
Assistance Operation ............................................... 125
Exiting The Parking Space........................................ 127
ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED ....................................................................128
Active Lane Management Operation .......................128
Turning Active Lane Management On Or Off...........129
Active Lane Management Warning Message..........129
Changing Active Lane Management Status ............130
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA............................131
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED ....................................................................132
Zoom View .................................................................133
REFUELING THE VEHICLE................................................134
VEHICLE LOADING ...........................................................134
Certification Label .....................................................134
TRAILER TOWING .............................................................135
Common Towing Definitions.....................................135
Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) ..........................137
Trailer And Tongue Weight........................................137
Towing Requirements ..............................................138
Towing Tips ...............................................................140
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME) .....141
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle...........141
Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel
Drive (FWD) Models ..................................................141
Recreational Towing —
4X4 Models................................................................142
DRIVING TIPS....................................................................142
On-Road Driving Tips.................................................142
Off-Road Driving Tips.................................................142
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ..................................................... 144
CYBERSECURITY ............................................................. 144
UCONNECT SETTINGS ..................................................... 145
Customer Programmable Features ......................... 145
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED .................................................................... 164
Radio Operation ........................................................ 164
Media Mode .............................................................. 164
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES.................. 164
Regulatory And Safety Information.......................... 164
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES........................................................... 165
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................................. 165
Rear Seat Reminder Alert (RSRA)............................ 166
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System .................. 166
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ...................................... 171
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) —
If Equipped ................................................................171
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation — If Equipped........................................... 175
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)................ 177
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ................................ 180
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ................... 180
Important Safety Precautions .................................. 180
Seat Belt Systems .................................................... 181
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) .................. 188
Child Restraints......................................................... 200
SAFETY TIPS .................................................................... 210
Transporting Passengers ......................................... 210
Transporting Pets .................................................... 210
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ............................................................... 210
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle.................................................. 212
Exhaust Gas .............................................................. 212
Carbon Monoxide Warnings..................................... 212
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ..................................... 213
SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED ........................................ 213
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING —
IF EQUIPPED
b
.............................................................. 216
Preparations For Jacking ......................................... 216
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage.......................... 217
Jacking Instructions ................................................. 218
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
b
........................... 220
JUMP STARTING............................................................... 225
Preparations For Jump Start.................................... 226
Jump Starting Procedure.......................................... 226
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY........................................... 227
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ....................................... 228
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ......................................... 228
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .......................................... 229
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE.......................................230
Without The Key Fob.................................................231
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models —
With Key Fob..............................................................231
4x4 Models ................................................................231
Emergency Tow Hooks —
If Equipped ................................................................232
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS) ...............................................................232
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)......................................232
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING .................................................233
Maintenance Plan .....................................................234
ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................................236
2.0L Engine................................................................236
Checking Oil Level .....................................................237
Adding Washer Fluid ................................................237
Maintenance-Free Battery ........................................237
Pressure Washing .....................................................238
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE..................................................238
Engine Oil...................................................................238
Engine Oil Filter .........................................................238
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ...........................................239
Air Conditioner Maintenance....................................239
Body Lubrication........................................................240
Wiper Blades .............................................................240
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
Exhaust System ........................................................ 243
Cooling System.......................................................... 244
Brake System ........................................................... 246
Automatic Transmission........................................... 247
Fuses ......................................................................... 248
Bulb Replacement ................................................... 257
TIRES ................................................................................ 264
Tire Safety Information ............................................ 264
Tires — General Information .................................... 271
Tire Types................................................................... 274
Spare Tires — If Equipped ........................................ 275
Tire Rotation Recommendations ............................ 276
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES .................................................. 276
Treadwear.................................................................. 276
Traction Grades......................................................... 276
Temperature Grades................................................. 277
STORING THE VEHICLE.................................................... 277
BODYWORK ...................................................................... 277
Protection From Atmospheric Agents ......................277
Body And Underbody Maintenance ......................... 278
Preserving The Bodywork ......................................... 279
INTERIORS ....................................................................... 279
Seats And Fabric Parts............................................. 279
Plastic And Coated Parts.......................................... 280
Leather Surfaces ...................................................... 280
Glass Surfaces ......................................................... 280
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)..................... 281
BRAKE SYSTEM .............................................................. 281
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS .............. 281
Torque Specifications............................................... 281
FUEL REQUIREMENTS..................................................... 282
2.0L Engine............................................................... 282
Reformulated Gasoline ........................................... 282
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ................................... 282
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles..................... 283
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications.................. 283
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline................................. 283
Materials Added To Fuel .......................................... 283
Fuel System Cautions............................................... 283
FLUID CAPACITIES .......................................................... 284
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ............................... 284
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS............................. 285
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE .................................................................286
Prepare For The Appointment ..................................286
Prepare A List ............................................................286
Be Reasonable With Requests.................................286
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .............................................286
Roadside Assistance.................................................286
FCA US LLC Customer Center...................................288
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........................288
Mexico........................................................................288
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands............................288
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY).....................................288
Service Contract .......................................................288
WARRANTY INFORMATION.............................................289
MOPAR® PARTS ..............................................................289
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ......................................289
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C........289
In Canada...................................................................289
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .......................................290
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS.......................290
GENERAL INFORMATION.................................................290
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Jeep® vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers as well as the details of the
terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you should
only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner’s Information, which may or
may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible
way. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Jeep® best, have factory-trained technicians and genuine Mopar® parts, and care about your satisfaction.
1
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
SYMBOLS KEY
If you do not read the entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information.
Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This
vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger
vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven
in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of
gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can
cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision,
rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or
fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts
could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling
injuries by two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
These statements apply to operating procedures that
could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements apply to procedures that could result in
damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation, operation,
and reliability. If not followed, may result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier use of
the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information on a
particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information pertaining to
the topic.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness
and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be
observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when operating
your vehicle. See below for the definition of each symbol
Ú page 81.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 81
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 81
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 82
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 82
Drowsiness Detected Warning Light
Ú page 82
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
Ú page 82
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 82
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 82
Hood Open Warning Light
Ú page 82
Liftgate Open Warning Light
Ú page 82
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 83
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 83
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 83
Transmission Fault Warning Light
Ú page 83
Red Warning Lights
1
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 83
Vehicle Security Warning Light
Ú page 83
Yellow Warning Lights
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 83
Electric Park Brake Warning Light
Ú page 83
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
Ú page 84
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
Ú page 84
Fuel Cutoff Warning Light
Ú page 84
Red Warning Lights
Active Lane Management Warning Light
Ú page 84
Service Active Lane Management Warning Light
Ú page 84
Low Coolant Level Warning Light
Ú page 84
Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 84
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
Ú page 84
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator (MIL) Warning Light
Ú page 84
Service 4WD Warning Light
Ú page 85
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
Ú page 85
Yellow Warning Lights
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
Ú page 85
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Ú page 85
Towing Hook Breakdown Warning Light
Ú page 86
Yellow Indicator Lights
4WD Low Indicator Light
Ú page 86
4WD Lock Indicator Light
Ú page 86
Auto HOLD! Fault Indicator Light
Ú page 86
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Indicator Light
Ú page 87
Yellow Warning Lights
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF Indicator Light
Ú page 87
Immobilizer Fail/VPS Electrical Alarm Indicator Light
Ú page 87
Green Indicator Lights
Active Lane Management Indicator Light
Ú page 87
Auto HOLD Indicator Light
Ú page 87
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
Ú page 87
Front Fog Indicator Light
Ú page 87
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Ú page 87
Yellow Indicator Lights
1
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light
Ú page 87
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
Ú page 87
Automatic High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 88
White Indicator Lights
Active Lane Management Indicator Light
Ú page 88
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
Ú page 88
Green Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
Ú page 88
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light
Ú page 88
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 88
Gray Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
Ú page 88
White Indicator Lights
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
13
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOBS
Your vehicle is equipped with a keyless ignition key fob.
The keyless ignition key fob supports Passive Entry,
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
(if equipped), Remote Start (if equipped), and remote
power liftgate operation. The keyless ignition key fob
supports vehicles equipped with a START/STOP ignition
button. The keyless ignition key fob also includes an
emergency key, which is stored in the rear of the key fob.
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m).
The key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to
activate the system.
NOTE:
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if the key
fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other
electronic device. This may result in poor performance.
With the ignition on and the vehicle moving at 2 mph
(4 km/h), all RKE commands are disabled.
Key Fob
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with the push
of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully depleted
battery. A low key fob battery can be verified by referring to
the instrument cluster, which will display directions to
follow
Ú page 290.
To Unlock/Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
unlock the driver’s door. If selected within Uconnect
Settings, pushing the unlock button twice within
five seconds will unlock all the doors and the liftgate.
To lock all the doors and the liftgate, push the lock button
once
Ú page 145.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will flash
and the illuminated entry system will be activated. When
the doors are locked, the turn signals will flash and the
horn will chirp.
1 — Unlock Button
2 — Liftgate Button
3 — Emergency Key
4 — Lock Button
5 — Remote Start Button
6 — Panic Button
2
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Key Left Vehicle Feature
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the vehicle
while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the ON/RUN or
START position, the message “Key Fob Has Left The
Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster display
along with an interior chime. An exterior audible and
visual alert will also be activated to warn the driver.
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times along with
a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior lights.
NOTE:
The doors have to be open and then closed in order for
the vehicle to check for the presence of a key fob; the
Key Left Vehicle feature will not activate until all of the
doors are closed.
These alerts will not be activated in situations where
the vehicle’s engine is left running with the key fob
inside.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The replacement battery is one CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin battery
dimensions may not meet the original OEM coin battery
dimensions.
Perchlorate material — special handling may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for
further information.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
Key Fob:
1. Remove the emergency key (2) by sliding the
emergency key release (1) on the back of the key fob
and pulling the emergency key out with your other
hand.
Emergency Key Removal
2. Separate the key fob halves using a #2 flat blade
screwdriver or a coin, and gently pry the two halves of
the key fob apart. Make sure not to damage the seal
during removal.
Separating Case With A Coin
Key Fob Battery Replacement
3. Remove the back cover to access and replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the (+)
sign on the battery to the (+) sign on the inside of the
battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching
the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
1 — Emergency Key Release
2 — Emergency Key
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves
together.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
repurposed and reprogrammed to another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle elec-
tronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank
key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one
that has never been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an autho-
rized dealer.
Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to match
the vehicle locks.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized
vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system
does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is
automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or
unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition
and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent
unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs
that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start
and operate the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a
key fob obtained from another vehicle.
After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it
indicates that someone attempted to start the engine with
an invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used
to start the engine but there is an issue with the vehicle
electronics, the engine will start and shut off after
two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should
this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible
by an authorized dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics
Ú page 290.
NOTE:
A key fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key.
WARNING!
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell battery.
Do not ingest the battery; there is a chemical burn
hazard. If the coin cell battery is swallowed, it can
cause severe internal burns in just two hours and
can lead to death.
If you think a battery may have been swallowed or
placed inside any part of the body, seek immediate
medical attention.
Keep new and used batteries away from children.
If the battery compartment does not close securely,
stop using the product and keep it away from chil-
dren.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition, always remember to place the
ignition in the OFF position when exiting the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket Remote Start systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
2
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with
the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has three operating
modes. The three modes are OFF, ON/RUN, and START.
START/STOP Ignition Button
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped.
Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks, alarm, etc.)
are still available.
ON/RUN
Driving mode.
All electrical devices are available (e.g. climate
controls, heated seats, etc.).
START
The engine will start.
NOTE:
If the ignition state/mode does not change with the push
of a button, the key fob may have a low or depleted
battery. In this situation, a backup method can be used to
operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side
opposite of the emergency key) of the key fob against the
START/STOP ignition button and push to operate the
ignition.
Starting The Ignition With Depleted Key Fob Battery
1 — OFF
2 — ON/RUN
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
NOTE:
For information on normal starting, see Ú page 90.
When opening the driver's door and the ignition is in
the ON/RUN (engine not running) position, a chime will
sound to remind you to place the ignition in the OFF
position. In addition to the chime, the “Vehicle On”
message will display in the cluster.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the engine
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range
of approximately 328 ft (100 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold weather
and to reach a comfortable climate in all ambient
conditions before the customer enters the vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may reduce
this range Ú page 290.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the
parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp twice
(if programmed). Then, the engine will start, and the
vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a
15 minute cycle. Pushing the Remote Start button a
third time shuts the engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button and place
the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes.
Remote Start can only be used twice.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
The parking lights will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
For security, power window and power sunroof opera-
tion (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in
the Remote Start mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position
before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated for
a third cycle.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ in the ON/RUN position. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always
remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause
serious injury or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
2
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Liftgate closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
Panic button not pushed
System not disabled from previous Remote Start event
Vehicle Security Light flashing (if equipped)
Ignition in the OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
Vehicle Security system is not signaling an intrusion
Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start
system, push and release the START/STOP ignition button
prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if the
Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed again, or if
the engine is allowed to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the
climate controls will resume previously set operations
(temperature, blower control, etc.).
NOTE:
For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry feature, the ignition
switch must be in the ON/RUN position in order to drive
the vehicle.
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ —
Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start
Active — Push Start Button” will show in the instrument
cluster display until you push the START/STOP ignition
button.
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable for two seconds after receiving a valid
Remote Start request.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside ambient
temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the system will
automatically activate front defrost for 15 minutes or less.
The timing is dependent on the ambient temperature.
Once the timer expires, the system will automatically
adjust the settings depending on ambient conditions. See
“Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the next
section for detailed operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear defrost
will automatically turn on in cold weather. The heated
steering wheel and driver heated seat feature will turn on
if programmed in the Comfort menu screen within
Uconnect Settings
Ú page 145. In warm weather, the
driver vented seat feature will automatically turn on when
Remote Start is activated, if programmed in the Comfort
menu screen. The vehicle will adjust the climate control
settings depending on the outside ambient temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped
The climate controls will automatically adjust to the
optimal temperature and mode settings depending on the
outside ambient temperature. This will occur until the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position where the
climate controls will resume their previous settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped
In ambient temperatures of 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the
climate settings will default to maximum heat, with
fresh air entering the cabin. If the front defrost timer
expires, the vehicle will enter Mix mode.
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to 78°F
(26°C), the climate settings will be based on the last
settings selected by the driver.
In ambient temperatures of 78°F (26°C) or above, the
climate settings will default to MAX A/C, Bi-Level mode,
with Recirculation on.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause
serious injury or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate control
settings, see Ú page 45.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of Remote
Start, or until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position. The climate control settings will change, and exit
the automatic defaults, if manually adjusted by the driver
while the vehicle is in Remote Start mode. This includes
turning the climate controls off using the OFF button.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER
D
E-ICER ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote Start will
resume its previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will continue.
REMOTE START ABORT MESSAGE —
I
F EQUIPPED
One of the following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote
start or exits Remote Start prematurely:
Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open
Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
Remote Start Aborted — Liftgate Open
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
Remote Start Aborted — Too Cold
Remote Start Aborted — Time Expired
The message will stay active until the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle doors,
hood, liftgate, and the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition for
unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security system
is armed, interior switches for door locks and liftgate
release are disabled. If something triggers the system, the
Vehicle Security system will provide the following audible
and visible signals:
The horn will pulse
The turn signals will flash
The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will
flash
NOTE:
The Vehicle Security system is factory adjusted to stan-
dards from different countries.
The Vehicle Security system is a complementary secu-
rity system developed to hinder the occurrence of
vehicle theft and prevent vandalism. It does not
prevent the theft of your vehicle; the system is
a deterrent.
The Vehicle Security system does not monitor glass
breakage or the movement of objects or people inside
the vehicle. The alarm does not intervene in the case of
vehicle tilt variations when it is parked.
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the
OFF position.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry, make
sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
Push the lock button on the interior power door
lock switch with the driver and/or passenger door
open.
Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
door handle with a valid key fob available in the
same exterior zone
Ú page 21.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the
Vehicle Security Light (located in the lower left portion of
the instrument cluster display) will begin to flash every
three seconds until it is disarmed.
NOTE:
If the system is armed by pushing the lock button on the
interior door panel, the Vehicle Security Light will flash
rapidly for about 15 seconds once the door is closed, then
slow down to every three seconds.
2
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock the door
Ú page 21.
Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to disarm the
system.
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate button on
the key fob cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security
system.
The Vehicle Security system remains armed during
power liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will not
disarm the Vehicle Security system. If someone enters
the vehicle through the opened liftgate, then opens any
door, the alarm will sound.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle
Security system will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will turn the horn off
after approximately 90 seconds, and then the Vehicle
Security system will rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
The door locks can be manually locked from inside the
vehicle by using the door lock knob.
Manual Door Lock Knob
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on each door
trim panel forward until the lock indicator is shown. To
unlock the front doors, pull the inside door handle to the
first detent or rotate the door lock button until the lock
indicator is hidden. To unlock the rear doors, rotate the
door lock button until the lock indicator is hidden. If the
door lock button is locked (lock indicator visible) when you
shut the door, the door will remain locked. Therefore,
make sure the key fob is not inside the vehicle before
closing the door.
NOTE:
Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the
Vehicle Security system.
The manual door locks will not lock or unlock the
liftgate.
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and exit the vehicle.
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. If equipped
with a Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition, always make
sure the keyless ignition is in the OFF position,
remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause severe personal injuries or death.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
POWER DOOR LOCKS
The power door lock switches are located on each front
door panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock the doors
and liftgate.
Power Door Lock Switch
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition is
in the ON/RUN position, and any door or the liftgate is
open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents you
from accidentally locking the key fob in the vehicle.
Placing the ignition in the OFF position or closing the doors
and liftgate will allow the locks to operate.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — PASSIVE
E
NTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature of
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry. This feature allows
you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having
to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off through
Uconnect Settings
Ú page 145.
The key fob may not detect the Passive Entry system if
it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop or other
electronic device; these devices may block the key
fob’s wireless signal and prevent the Passive Entry
system from locking and unlocking the vehicle.
If wearing gloves, if it has been raining/snowing, or
there is salt/dirt covering the Passive Entry door
handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting
in a slower response time.
The doors may unlock when water is sprayed on the
Passive Entry door handles, if the key fob is located
outside of the vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the handle.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will relock
and, if equipped, will arm the Vehicle Security system.
To Unlock From The Driver's Side Or Passenger’s Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
either front door handle, grab the door handle to unlock
the door automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock when
you grab hold of the front driver’s door handle,
depending on the selected setting in the Uconnect
system
Ú page 145.
All doors and the liftgate will unlock when the front
passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children. Do not leave the
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ON/RUN posi-
tion. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
2
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature
which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF
position.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search
in any Passive Entry vehicle:
A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key fob
while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors are
shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it detects a
Passive Entry key fob inside the vehicle and it does not
detect any Passive Entry key fobs outside the vehicle, then
the vehicle will unlock and alert the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid Passive
Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle. The vehicle will
not unlock the doors when any of the following conditions
are true:
The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then the doors are closed.
There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the
vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive Entry
door handle.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within
5 ft (1.5 m) of either front door handle, push the Passive
Entry lock button located on the outside door handle to
lock the vehicle doors and liftgate.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
NOTE:
DO NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle without the vehicle unlocking.
If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect
settings, the key fob protection described in
"Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)" remains active/functional.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob
battery is depleted.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
Electronic Liftgate Release Handle
The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release handle. With a valid Passive
Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the
electronic liftgate release handle to open.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when
the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto
door lock feature is enabled or disabled by an authorized
dealer per written request of the customer. Please see an
authorized dealer for service.
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON EXIT
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power
door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is
enabled.
2. All doors are closed.
3. The gear selector was not in PARK, then is placed in
PARK.
4. Any door is opened.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
S
YSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in
the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade
screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the dial to the
lock or unlock position. When the system on a door is
engaged, that door can only be opened by using the
outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
unlocked position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
NOTE:
When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle even though the inside door lock
is in the unlocked position.
After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system,
always test the door from the inside to make certain it
is in the desired position.
For emergency exit with the system engaged, rotate the
door lock button until the lock indicator is hidden
(unlocked position), roll down the window, and open
the door with the outside door handle.
2
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children. After
engaging the child lock on both rear doors, check for
effective engagement by trying to open a door with the
internal handle. Once the Child-Protection Door Lock
system is engaged, it is impossible to open the doors from
inside the vehicle. Before getting out of the vehicle, be
sure to check that there is no one left inside.
STEERING WHEEL
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located
below the steering wheel at the end of the steering
column.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the control handle
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column,
move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired.
To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the
steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To
lock the steering column in position, push the control
handle upward until fully engaged.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
I
F EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel has only one
temperature setting. Once the heated steering
wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until the operator
turns it off. The heated steering wheel may not turn on
when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located within
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control
button through the climate screen or the controls screen.
Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn
the heating element on.
Press the heated steering wheel button a second time
to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel
to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system, see
Ú page 18.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from
the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to save up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch.
Each memory profile saves desired position settings for
the following features:
Driver seat position
Easy Entry/Exit seat (if equipped)
A set of desired radio station presets
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each can be
linked to either memory position 1 or 2.
The memory setting switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons:
The set (S) button, which is used to activate the
memory save function.
The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall either
of two saved memory profiles.
Memory Switches
PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY FEATURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
NOTE:
Saving a new memory profile will erase an existing profile
from memory.
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON position.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., seat and radio station presets).
3. Push the set (S) button on the memory switch, and
then push the desired memory button (1 or 2) within
five seconds. The instrument cluster display will
display which memory position is being set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK,
but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile.
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE REMOTE
K
EYLESS ENTRY KEY FOB TO MEMORY
Your remote keyless entry key fob can be programmed to
recall one of two saved memory profiles.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fob you must select the
“Memory Linked To FOB” feature through the Uconnect
Settings
Ú page 145.
To program your key fob, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
2. Select the desired memory profile (1) or (2).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch, then within five seconds push and
release the button labeled (1) or (2) accordingly.
“Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the
instrument cluster display.
4. Push and release the lock button on the key fob
within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fob can be unlinked from your memory settings
by pushing the set (S) button, followed by pushing the
unlock button on the key fob within 10 seconds.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
WARNING!
2
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
NOTE:
The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions.
If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK, a
message will display in the instrument cluster display.
To recall the memory settings for driver one or two, push
the desired memory button number (1 or 2) or the unlock
button on the key fob linked to the desired memory
position.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the memory
buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When a recall is
canceled, the driver seat will stop moving. A delay of one
second will occur before another recall can be selected.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system of
the vehicle.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
Some models may be equipped with manual front seats.
The seats can be adjusted forward or rearward by using a
bar located by the front of the seat cushion, near the floor.
Front Seat Adjustment
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the
seat adjusters have latched.
Manual Seat Height Adjustment —
If Equipped
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using
a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. Pull
upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push
downward on the lever to lower the seat height.
Seat Height Adjustment
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat
belt.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
Recline Lever
Fold-Forward Front Passenger Seat —
If Equipped
This feature allows for extended cargo space. When the
seat is folded flat, it is an extension of the load floor
surface (allowing long cargo to fit from the rear hatch up
to the instrument panel). The fold-forward seatback has a
softback surface that you can use as a work surface when
the seat is folded forward and the vehicle is not in motion.
Pull upward on the recline lever to fold or unfold the seat.
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat cushion from
the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for an
extended period of time. This is normal and by simply
unfolding the seats to the open position, over time the
seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS)
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With
Fold-Flat Feature
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still
maintains some rear seating room.
NOTE:
Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to
position the front seat to its mid-track position. Also, be
sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned
forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. Adjust any seat only while the
vehicle is parked.
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TO LOWER THE REAR SEAT
1. Pull the seatback release lever located on either
side of the upper outer edge of the seat.
Rear Seat Release Lever
2. Fold that side of the rear seatback completely
forward.
TO RAISE THE REAR SEAT
NOTE:
If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback
from fully locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat
to its proper position.
Raise the seatback and lock it into place.
The release lever will show a red indicator while in the
unlocked position. Once the seat is locked in, the red
indicator will no longer be visible.
POWER ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
Some models may be equipped with a power driver's seat
and/or power passenger seat. The power seat switch and
power seat recliner switch are located on the outboard
side of the seat near the floor. Use the power seat switch
to adjust seat height, angle, or forward/rearward position.
Use the power seat recline switch to adjust the angle of
the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
Forward Or Rearward Adjustment
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push
the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Height Adjustment
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
Tilt Adjustment
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or down.
Pull upward or push downward on the front of the seat
switch and the front of the seat cushion will move in the
direction of the switch.
1 — Seat Belt Guide
2 — Seatback Release Lever
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability for
child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Power Recline Switch
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
Reclining The Seatback Forward Or
Rearward
The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward.
Push the seat recliner switch forward or rearward. The
seatback will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support.
Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support.
Power Lumbar Switch
Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you
have the driver seat positioned when you place the
vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF posi-
tion, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches
(60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater
than or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the
rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set posi-
tion when you place the vehicle’s ignition in the RUN
position.
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 of an inch
(22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position,
there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for
Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry and Easy
Exit positions are stored in each memory setting profile of
the Driver Memory Settings
Ú page 25.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when the
vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry/Exit
feature is enabled (or later disabled) through the program-
mable features in the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 145.
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are
located within the Uconnect system. You can
gain access to the control buttons through the
climate screen or the controls screen.
Press the heated seat button once to turn the
HI setting on.
Press the heated seat button a second time to turn the
LO setting on.
Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the
heating elements off.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
2
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If the HI level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO level after approximately
60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the
display will change from HI to LO, indicating the change.
The LO level setting will turn off automatically after
approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system, see
Ú page 18.
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the two outboard rear seats
are equipped with heated seats. The heated
seat switches for these seats are located on
the rear of the center console.
There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear
passengers to operate the seats independently. Indicator
lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use.
Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO and
none for off.
Push the heated seat button once to turn the HI setting on.
Push the heated seat button a second time to turn the
LO setting on.
Push the heated seat button a third time to turn the
heating elements off.
NOTE:
The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator
changes it.
FRONT VENTILATED SEATS —
I
F EQUIPPED
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are
fans that draw the air from the passenger
compartment and move air through fine
perforations in the seat cover to help keep the
driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient
temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds, HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
control buttons through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI.
Press the ventilated seat button a second time to
choose LO.
Press the ventilated seat button a third time to turn the
ventilated seat off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to
operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system, see
Ú page 18.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
NOTE:
Do not reverse the head restraints (making the rear of the
head restraint face forward) in an attempt to gain addi-
tional clearance to the back of your head.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted while
the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the
head restraints improperly adjusted or removed
could cause serious injury or death in the event
of a collision.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
Front Head Restraint Adjustment
Your vehicle is equipped with front two way driver and
passenger head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
Head Restraint Adjustment Button
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed by qualified
technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head
restraints require removal, see an authorized dealer.
Rear Head Restraints
The rear head restraints have two positions: up or down.
When the center seat is being occupied, the head restraint
should be in the raised position. When there is no
occupant in the center seat, the head restraint can be
lowered for maximum visibility for the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
Outboard Head Restraint Adjustment Button
Center Head Restraint Adjustment Button
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed by qualified
technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head
restraints require removal, see an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause
serious injury or death in the event of a collision.
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
2
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS — IF EQUIPPED
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips
you need to know to control your vehicle’s Voice
Recognition (VR) system.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The following Voice Commands can be given at any point
while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button or say the vehicle’s Wake Up word,
“Hey Uconnect” or “Hey Jeep®”. The factory default Wake
Up word is set to “Hey Uconnect” and can be
reprogrammed through the Uconnect Settings.
After the beep, say:
“
Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
“
Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands.
“
Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
Recognition system’s status.
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate/deactivate your
Voice Recognition system. You can also use the system’s
“Wake Up” word to activate voice recognition. The Wake
Up word can be set through the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 145.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Reduce background noise. Wind noise and passenger
conversations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead.
Each time you give a Voice Command, first push the
VR button or say the “Wake Up” word, wait until
after the beep, then say your Voice Command.
You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR button and saying a Voice Command
from the current category.
You can also interrupt the help message or system
prompts by speaking. This feature is called “barge-in”
and can be set through the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 145.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2022 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. SiriusXM® and all
related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM®
Radio Inc.
Ú page 290.
For Uconnect system support, call 1-877-855-8400
(24 hours a day 7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com
(US) or DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
1 — For Vehicles Equipped With Navigation:
Push The Voice Recognition Button To Begin Radio,
Media, Navigation, Climate, Start Or Answer A Phone
Call, And Send Or Receive A Text
1 — For Vehicles Not Equipped With Navigation: Push The
Phone Button To Answer An Incoming Phone Call
2 — Push To Access The Tile Feature
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
This is a single ball joint mirror that fixes to the windshield
with a counterclockwise rotation. No tools are needed for
mounting. The rearview mirror can be adjusted left and
right, or tilted up and down. The mirror should be adjusted
to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by
moving the small control under the mirror to the night position
(toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This is a single ball joint mirror that fixes to the windshield
button with a counterclockwise rotation. No tools are
needed for mounting. The rearview mirror can be adjusted
left and right, or tilted up and down. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when
the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the driver’s rear view.
If your vehicle is equipped with an on/off button on the
mirror, the mirror will default to on and can be turned
on/off through the touchscreen.
You can turn the Automatic Dimming Mirror feature on
or off by pushing the button at the base of the mirror
(if equipped). If your vehicle is not equipped with an on/off
button, the auto dimming feature is always on.
Automatic Dimming Button
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of the
visors and lift the mirror cover.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror Cover
Sun Visor Slide-On-Rod Feature —
If Equipped
The sun visor Slide-On-Rod feature allows for additional
flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
4. Extend the sun visor for additional sun blockage.
NOTE:
The sun visor can also be extended while the sun visor is
against the windshield for additional sun blockage
through the front of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
2
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center of the
adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the optimal view.
NOTE:
The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much
wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane next to
your vehicle.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS WITH TURN
S
IGNAL — IF EQUIPPED
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal
lighting contain LEDs, which are located in the upper outer
corner of each mirror.
The LEDs are turn signal indicators, which flash with the
corresponding turn signal lights in the front and rear of the
vehicle. Turning on the Hazard Warning flashers will also
activate these LEDs.
POWER ADJUSTMENT MIRRORS
The power mirror control switch is located on the driver's
side door trim panel.
To adjust a mirror, rotate the control switch to the desired
mirror: (L) or (R). Then push the switch in the direction that
you want the mirror to move.
Power Mirror Switch
NOTE:
Once adjustment is complete, rotate the knob to the
neutral position to prevent accidental movements.
Power Folding — If Equipped
To fold the door mirrors in using the Power Folding Mirror
function, rotate the control switch to the power folding
position. Rotating the control to the left, right, or neutral
position will return the mirrors to the driving position.
If the power mirror control switch is moved again during
door mirror folding (from closed to open position and
vice versa), the movement direction is reversed.
Power mirror position can be saved as part of the
Driver Memory Settings (if equipped)
Ú page 25.
FOLDING MIRRORS
The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to pivot
forward or rearward to help avoid damage. The mirror has
three detent positions: full forward, normal and full
rearward.
Folding Exterior Mirror
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than
they really are. Relying too much on your passenger
side convex mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror
when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in
the passenger side convex mirror.
1 — Neutral Position
2 — Left Mirror
3 — Control Switch
4 — Right Mirror
5 — Power Folding Position (If Equipped)
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice.
This feature will be activated whenever you
turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped)
Ú page 45.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® Buttons On Sun Visor
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
HomeLink® replaces up to three
hand-held transmitters that operate
devices such as garage door
openers, motorized gates, lighting,
or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your
vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the over-
head console or sunvisor designate the three different
HomeLink® channels.
To operate HomeLink®, push and release any of the
programmed HomeLink® buttons. These buttons will
activate the devices they are programmed to with each
press of the corresponding HomeLink® button.
The HomeLink® indicator light is located above the
center button.
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security system
is active Ú page 290.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
H
OMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate transmission of
the Radio Frequency (RF) signal, it is recommended that a
new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the
device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system. Make sure your hand-held transmitter is
programmed to activate the device you are trying to
program your HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the
garage before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the channels of
your HomeLink® before you use it for the first time.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
C
HANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons
(I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until the
HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A
R
OLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE
D
EVICE
Before programming a device to one of your HomeLink®
buttons, you must determine whether the device has a
rolling code or non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a good
indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically, devices
manufactured after 1995 have rolling codes. A device with
a rolling code will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button
located where the antenna is attached to the device. The
button may not be immediately visible when looking at the
device. The name and color of the button may vary slightly
by manufacturer.
2
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button you
normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not have a
rolling code. These devices will also not have a “LEARN” or
“TRAIN” button.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
G
ARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to activate your
garage door opener motor, proceed as follows:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this
procedure. You do not need to erase all channels when
programming additional buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®
button you wish to program, while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to
program while you push and hold the garage door
opener transmitter button you are trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator
light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Once this
happens, release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is plugged in
before moving on to the rolling code/non-rolling code final
steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling code final
step 2, after completing rolling code final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener motor. Firmly
push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink® button three times (holding the button
for two seconds each time). If the garage door opener
motor operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to confirm
that the garage door opener motor operates. If the
garage door opener motor does not operate, repeat
the final steps for the rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the HomeLink® indicator light. If the
HomeLink® indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to confirm
that the garage door opener motor operates. If the
garage door opener motor does not operate, repeat
the steps from the beginning.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
M
ISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
The procedure on how to program HomeLink® to a
miscellaneous device follows the same procedure as
programming to a garage door opener
Ú page 145.
Be sure to determine if the device has a rolling code, or
non-rolling code before beginning the programming
process.
NOTE:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmitter
signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission, which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to
pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner. The procedure may need to
be performed multiple times to successfully pair the
device to your HomeLink® buttons.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close while
you are programming the universal transceiver. Do
not program the transceiver if people or pets are in
the path of the door or gate.
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or confined
area while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
from your vehicle contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which is odorless and colorless. Carbon monoxide is
poisonous when inhaled and can cause you and
others to be severely injured or killed.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
H
OMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has been
previously trained, without erasing all the channels,
proceed as follows. Be sure to determine whether the new
device you want to program the HomeLink® button to has
a rolling code, or non-rolling code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, without
starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the HomeLink® indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3.
Without releasing the button, proceed with Step 2 in
“Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener” and follow all remaining steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
P
ROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmitter
signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™, place
the ignition in the RUN position. Make sure while
programming HomeLink® with the engine on that your
vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the garage door
remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you
wish to program while keeping the HomeLink®
indicator light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button
while you push and release (cycle) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door may open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device
should activate when the HomeLink® button is
pushed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
2
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
SECURITY
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in
your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot
be erased.
The HomeLink® universal transmitter is disabled when
the Vehicle Security system is active.
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®, here
are some of the most common solutions:
Replace the battery in the garage door opener
hand-held transmitter.
Push the LEARN button on the garage door opener to
complete the training for a rolling code.
Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of
the headlights, parking lights, automatic headlights
(if equipped), instrument panel lights, interior lights, and
fog lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transmitter. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
Your motorized door or gate will open and close while
you are programming the universal transmitter. Do
not program the transmitter if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transmitter with a garage door opener that has a
“stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use
a garage door opener without these safety features.
WARNING!
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Front Fog Light Switch
3 — Ambient Lighting Control (If Equipped)
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight
switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an OFF
detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the headlight
switch is placed in the parking lights position. However,
the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be activated along
with the front and rear marker lights. The DRLs may be
deactivated when the parking brake is engaged.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking lights and instrument panel lights operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlights, parking lights and instrument panel lights
operation.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise from the parking lights and instrument panel
lights position to the first detent for headlights,
parking lights and instrument panel lights operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
the AUTO position.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Daytime Running Lights will turn on when the engine
is started and remain on unless the headlamps are turned
on or the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime Running
Lights will automatically deactivate when the front fog
lights are turned on.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights may
deactivate or reduce intensity on one side of the
vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on that side), or
on both sides of the vehicle (when the hazard warning
lights are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel
to switch the headlights to high beams. Pulling the
multifunction lever back will turn the low beams on.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLAMP
C
ONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automating
high beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the windshield. This camera detects vehicle
specific light and automatically switches from high beams
to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off through Uconnect Settings
Ú page 145.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will
cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain on,
until the lever is released.
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Front Fog Light Switch
3 — Ambient Lighting Control (If Equipped)
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
2
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the last detent for
automatic headlight operation. When the system is on, the
headlight time delay feature is also on. This means the
headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place
the ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights will
come on in the automatic mode.
HEADLIGHT TIME DELAY
To assist when exiting the vehicle, the headlight delay
feature will leave the headlights on for up to 90 seconds.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the
OFF position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off
the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval
begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
Headlight delay can be cancelled by either turning the
headlights or parking lights on, or placing the ignition in
the ON/RUN position.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
feature. If the headlight switch is in the AUTO position
prior to placing the ignition in the OFF position, there is
no need to turn the headlight switch to off to activate
Headlight Delay.
The headlight delay timing is programmable through
Uconnect Settings
Ú page 145.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the driver's door is opened.
FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch.
Fog Light Switch
Fog Light Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or
the low beam headlights and push the fog light button.
To turn off the front fog lights, either push the fog lights
button a second time or turn off the headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE:
The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or
parking lights on. However, selecting the high beam head-
lights will turn off the fog lights.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
Cornering Lights
The cornering lights are a feature to improve visibility at
night while turning the vehicle. When activated, a light
incorporated in the front fog light will illuminate on the
side of the vehicle the steering wheel is rotated or the turn
signal indicator is on. It can be activated through the
Uconnect system
Ú page 145.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to activate the
turn signals. The arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster display flash to show proper operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there
is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb.
A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display and a continuous chime will sound
if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with
either turn signal on.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal will flash
five times then automatically turn off.
BATTERY SAVER FEATURE
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 15 minutes after the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position. This will occur if the interior
lights were switched on manually or are on because a
door is open.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
INTERIOR COURTESY LIGHTS
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened, or when the dimmer control is rotated
to its farthest upward position.
The front map/reading lights are turned on by the
switches in the center of the overhead console.
Overhead Light Switches
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 15 minutes after the ignition is placed in the
OFF position. This will occur if the interior lights were
turned on manually or are on because a door is open. This
includes the glove compartment light and the cargo area
light. To restore interior light operation, either place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position, or push the light switch on
and then back off.
2
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
The instrument panel dimmer control is part of the
headlight switch and is located on the driver’s side of the
instrument panel.
Rotating the instrument panel dimmer up or down will
adjust the brightness of the instrument panel lights
ONLY
when the parking lights or headlights are turned on,
AND
ONLY if the built in light sensor determines that the
ambient light levels are low enough that the backlighting
should be enabled.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Instrument Panel Dimmer (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
Ambient Light Control — If Equipped
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or downward
to increase or decrease the brightness of the ambient light
located in the overhead console, door handle lights, lights
under the instrument panel, door map pocket lights, and
cubby bin lights.
Ambient lights are only enabled when the headlights are
active.
Ambient Light Dimmer
Ambient Light Dimmer (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
Illuminated Entry — If Equipped
The Illuminated Entry feature allows you to activate the
low beam, parking lights, and side marker lights for
25 seconds when the vehicle is unlocked (through the
key fob or the Passive Entry door handles [if equipped]).
This feature can be activated or deactivated through the
Uconnect Settings
Ú page 145.
NOTE:
When a door is open with the feature active, the activa-
tion of the lights is extended for five seconds.
The feature is disabled when the vehicle is locked or
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the
steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotating
a switch, located on the end of the lever. For information
on the rear wiper/washer, see
Ú page 44.
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first two detent
positions for intermittent settings. The first intermittent
wiper interval is 10 seconds. The second intermittent wipe
interval is based on vehicle speed. Rotate to the third
detent for low wiper operation and the fourth detent for
high wiper operation.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold
while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the
intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and operate for
several wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off position,
the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles, then
turn off.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the switch
is held for more than 20 to 30 seconds. Once the lever is
released the pump will resume normal operation.
1 — Push Lever Forward & Hold For Rear Washer
2 — Rotate For Rear Wiper Operation
3 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation
4 — Pull Lever & Hold For Front Washer Operation
5 — Push Lever Upward For Mist
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the
windshield wiper blades from returning to the parked
position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off,
and the blades cannot return to the parked position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield
during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the
defroster before and during windshield washer use.
2
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Mist
Push the lever upward to the MIST position and release for
a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer pump;
therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the wind-
shield. The washer function must be used in order to spray
the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement, see
Ú page 240.
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snow fall on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers. Rotate the end of the
multifunction lever to one of two detent positions to
activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position two is the most
sensitive. Place the wiper switch in the O (off) position
when not using the system.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the wind-
shield.
Use of products containing wax or silicone may reduce
Rain Sensing performance.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
through Uconnect Settings
Ú page 145.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
Change In Ignition Position — If the vehicle is in Rain
Sensing mode and the ignition is cycled from OFF to
ON, the auto wiper will be suppressed until vehicle
speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the wiper
switch is moved out of and back into the Intermittent
wipe position.
Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — The Rain Sensing
system will not operate if the NEUTRAL gear is selected
at speeds of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less unless the wiper
switch is moved or the gear selector is moved out of
NEUTRAL.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped with
the Remote Start system, Rain Sensing wipers are not
operational when the vehicle is in Remote Start mode.
Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the
ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, Rain Sensing
wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected,
and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously)
exist.
REAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the
windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the
steering column. The rear wiper/washer is operated by
rotating a switch, located at the middle of the lever.
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the
windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the
steering column. The rear wiper has different operation
modes:
Intermittent mode
Synchronous mode (at half speed of the front window
wipers) when the front window wiper are operating
Continuous mode
Vehicle in REVERSE: If the front wipers are active and
the REVERSE gear is selected, the wiper will turn on for
one wipe
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to
the first detent for intermittent operation and to
the second detent for continuous rear wiper
operation.
To use the washer, push the lever forward and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is
pushed while the wiper is in the off position,
the wiper will operate for several wipe cycles,
then turn off.
If the lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting, the
wiper will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after
the end of the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the switch
is held for more than 20 to 30 seconds. Once the lever is
released the pump will resume normal operation.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
WINDSHIELD WIPER DE-ICER —
I
F EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield Wiper
De-Icer feature that may be activated under the following
conditions:
Activation By Front Defrost — The Windshield Wiper
De-Icer shall be activated automatically in the case of
a cold weather manual start with full front defrost, and
when the ambient temperature is below 33°F (0.6°C).
Activation By Rear Defrost — The Windshield Wiper
De-Icer shall be activated automatically when the rear
defrost is turned on and when the ambient tempera-
ture is below 33°F (0.6°C).
Activation By Remote Start Operation (If Equipped) —
When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer will be enabled. Exiting Remote Start will
resume its previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will
continue.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
touchscreen and on the instrument panel below the radio.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 5 With 10.1-inch Display Automatic
Climate Controls
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on the
touchscreen to change the current setting to
the coldest output of air. The MAX A/C indicator
illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the
button again will cause the MAX A/C operation to exit.
Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release the A/C button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate to change the current setting.
The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system.
When the air conditioning system is turned on, dehumidified
air will flow through the outlets into the cabin.
If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in
front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects.
Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of the
radiator and through the condenser. If the problem
persists, please contact an authorized dealer.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate, to change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air mode. The
Recirculation indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate
when the Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation
can be used when outside conditions such as smoke,
odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation
can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be
unavailable (button on the touchscreen grayed out) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually
without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous
use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air
stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this
mode is not recommended.
2
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
After 25 minutes of continuous use, Recirculation
mode will automatically shut off for two minutes to
allow fresh air intake inside the cabin to maintain suffi-
cient oxygen levels.
Recirculation mode will function in this way, in either
automatic or manual override mode.
AUTO Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate, to change the current setting.
The AUTO indicator illuminates when AUTO is
on. This feature automatically controls the interior cabin
temperature by adjusting distribution and amount of
airflow. Toggling this function will cause the system to
switch between manual override mode and automatic
modes
Ú page 50.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the touchscreen button, or
push and release the button on the faceplate,
to change the current airflow setting to Defrost
mode. The Front Defrost indicator illuminates
when Front Defrost is on. Air comes from the windshield
and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button
is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost
mode with maximum temperature settings for the best
windshield and side window defrosting and defogging
performance. When toggling the front defrost mode
button, the Climate Control system will return to the
previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the button on the
touchscreen, or push and release the button on
the faceplate, to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when
the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
Driver And Passenger Temperature
Control Buttons
These buttons provide the driver and passenger with
independent temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red arrow
button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue arrow
button on the touchscreen for cooler
temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to
toggle the Sync feature on/off. The SYNC
indicator is illuminated when SYNC is on.
SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger
temperature setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger temperature setting while in
SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating
elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount
of air forced through the Climate Control
system. There are seven blower speeds
available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control
knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and
the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
Mode Control
Mode Control regulates the airflow distribution.
The airflow distribution outlets are: instrument
panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets, and
demist outlets.
Faceplate
Push the Mode button to change the airflow distribution
mode.
Touchscreen
Press one of the MODE buttons to change the airflow
distribution mode.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes
of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from
these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air
from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost,
side window demister outlets, and panel
outboard outlets.
Defrost Mode
Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level may increase. Use
Defrost mode with maximum temperature
settings for best windshield and side window defrosting
and defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode
button, the Climate Control system will return to the
previous setting.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is ideal for maintaining comfort while reducing
moisture on the windshield. A slight amount of air is also
directed through the panel outboard outlets.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release the OFF button on
the touchscreen, or push and release the
OFF button on the faceplate to turn the
Climate Control ON/OFF.
2
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 5 With 10.1-inch Display Manual Climate Controls
MAX A/C Setting
Press and release the MAX A/C button on the
touchscreen to change the current setting to
the coldest output of air. The MAX A/C indicator
illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the
button again will cause the MAX A/C operation to exit.
Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the touchscreen.
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air
Conditioning (A/C). The A/C indicator
illuminates when A/C is on.
NOTE:
For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging
of the windows.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode, and increase blower speed if
needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser
(located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the
front of the radiator and through the condenser.
Recirculation Button
Push the Recirculation button to change the
system between recirculation mode and
outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator
and the A/C indicator illuminate when the
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation can be used
when outside conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all
modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may be
unavailable if conditions exist that could create fogging on
the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected
manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the
inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended
use of this mode is not recommended.
On systems with Manual Climate Controls, if equipped, the
Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation is
disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting
to use Recirculation while in this mode causes the LED in
the control button to blink and then turns off.
Front Defrost Setting
Press and release the touchscreen button, or
push and release the button on the faceplate,
to change the current airflow setting to Defrost
mode. The Front Defrost indicator illuminates
when Front Defrost is on. Air comes from the windshield
and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button
is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost
mode with maximum temperature settings for best
windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
When toggling the front defrost mode button, the Climate
Control system will return to the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the button on the
touchscreen, or push and release the button on
the faceplate, to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when
the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
Temperature Control
Temperature Control regulates the temperature of the
air forced through the climate system.
Push the red button on the faceplate, or
touchscreen, or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red arrow
button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate, or
touchscreen, or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue arrow
button on the touchscreen for cooler
temperature settings.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air
forced through the Climate Control system.
There are seven blower speeds available.
Adjusting the blower will cause automatic
mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be
selected using either the blower control knob on the
faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control
knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and
the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
Mode Control
Push the Mode Control button to change the
airflow distribution mode. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes
from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
defrost outlets, and demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes
of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from
these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air
from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating
elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
2
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Defrost Mode
Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level may increase. Use
Defrost mode with maximum temperature
settings for best windshield and side window defrosting
and defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode
button, the Climate Control system will return to the
previous setting.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is ideal for maintaining comfort while reducing
moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push and release the
button on the faceplate to turn the
Climate Control ON/OFF.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the
AUTO button on the touchscreen (if equipped) on
the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the temperature
control buttons. Once the desired temperature is
displayed, the system will achieve and automatically
maintains that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You experience
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system
to function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in US or Metric units
by selecting the US/Metric customer-programmable
feature.
To provide you with maximal comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan remains on low
until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in
speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will be
turned off when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
CLIMATE VOICE COMMANDS
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep
everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the beep,
say one of the following commands:
“
Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“
Set the passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
Did You Know: Voice Command for Climate may only be
used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle.
Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated seats
or steering wheel if equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested
control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating.
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling system is
functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and
concentration of coolant is used. Use of the Air
Recirculation mode during Winter months is not
recommended, because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control system
when the vehicle is being stored for an extended period of
time, see
Ú page 277.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed.
Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the air distribution box, they could plug the water
drains. In Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear
of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and pollen
from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your
cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control system may
automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort.
Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an
engine running condition.
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped
The windshield wiper De-Icer is a heating element located
at the base of the windshield.
It operates automatically once the following conditions are
met:
Activation By Front Defrost
The wiper De-Icer activates automatically during a cold
weather manual start with
full defrost, and when the
ambient temperature is below 33°F (6°C).
Activation By Rear Defrost
The wiper De-Icer activates automatically when the
Rear Defrost is operating and the
ambient temperature
is below 33°F (6°C).
Activation By Remote Start Operation
When Remote Start is activated and the
outside
ambient temperature is less than 33°F (6°C) the wind-
shield wiper De-Icer is activated. Exiting Remote Start
will resume its previous operation. If the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will
continue.
Operating Tips Chart
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And Vehicle
Interior Is Very Hot
Set the mode control to
(Panel Mode),
(MAX A/C) on, and
blower on high. Roll down
the windows for a minute to
flush out the hot air. Adjust
the controls as needed to
achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn (A/C) on and
set the mode control to
(Panel Mode).
Cool Sunny
Operate in (Bi-Level
Mode).
Cool & Humid Conditions
Set the mode control
to (Mix Mode) and
turn (A/C) on to keep
windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode).
If windshield fogging starts
to occur, move the control
to (Mix Mode).
2
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
of the instrument panel.
Glove Compartment
To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle.
Console Storage Compartment
To open, pull up on the latch and lift the cover.
Center Console
The center console has a storage area which can hold cell
phones, PDAs, and other small items. The center console
can slide forward and rearward for comfort.
USB CONTROL
This feature allows an external USB device to be plugged
into one of the USB ports, located in the center stack of
the instrument panel.
Front USB Ports
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port will activate
Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay® features, if equipped.
For further information, refer to “Android Auto™” or
“Apple CarPlay®” in the Uconnect Radio Instruction
Manual.
NOTE:
Two devices can be plugged in at the same time, and both
ports will provide charging capabilities. Only one port can
transfer data to the system at a time.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove compartment in
the open position. Driving with the glove compartment
open may result in injury in a collision.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment
lid in the open position. Driving with the console
compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision.
1 — Type C USB Port
2 — Type A USB Port
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A USB port
and another device is plugged into the Type C USB port, a
message will appear and allow you to select which device
to use.
Different scenarios are listed below when a non-phone
device is plugged into the smaller and larger USB ports,
and when a phone device is plugged into the smaller and
larger USB ports:
“A new device is now connected. Previous connection
was lost.”
“(Phone Name) now connected. Previous connection
was lost.”
“Another device is in use through the same USB port.
Please disconnect the first device to use the second
device.”
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may cause the
connection to a previous device to be lost.
By using a USB cable to connect an external device:
The device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing the artist, track title, and album
information on the radio display.
NOTE:
Depending on track configuration, track information may
not be present on the radio display.
The device can be controlled using the radio buttons to
play, and browse the contents of the device.
The audio device battery charges when plugged into
the USB port.
The second row USB ports can be used to charge an
external device.
Charge Only Rear USB Ports
NOTE:
Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only USB
ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into a Media
USB port, a message will display on the touchscreen that
the device is not supported by the system.
POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
Power outlets labeled with a key symbol are powered when
the ignition is in the ON/RUN position, while the outlets
labeled with a battery symbol are connected directly to the
battery, and powered at all times.
NOTE:
All accessories connected to the battery powered outlets
should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in
use to protect the battery against discharge.
If equipped, the front power outlet is located on the center
stack of the instrument panel.
Front Power Outlet
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper
use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
2
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
If equipped, a power outlet is located in the rear cargo
area.
Rear Cargo Area Power Outlet — If Equipped
NOTE:
The rear cargo area power outlet can be switched from
ignition-only to constant battery powered all the time.
See an authorized dealer for details.
WIRELESS CHARGING PAD —
I
F EQUIPPED
Wireless Charging Pad
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15W 3A Qi wireless
charging pad located below the center stack by the
cupholders. This charging pad is designed to wirelessly
charge your Qi enabled mobile phone. Qi is a standard that
allows wireless charging of your mobile phone.
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi wireless
charging. If the phone is not equipped with Qi wireless
charging functionality, an aftermarket sleeve or a
specialized back plate can be purchased from your mobile
phone provider or a local electronics retailer. Please see
your phone’s owner’s manual for further information.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge suffi-
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces-
sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle's battery.
WARNING!
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an anti-slip
mat to hold your mobile phone in place, and an LED
indicator light.
LED Indicator Status:
No Light: Charging pad is idle or searching for a device.
Blue Light: Device is detected and is charging.
Red Light/Flashing: Internal error, or foreign object is
detected.
Important Notes Regarding This Vehicle’s Wireless
Charging Pad:
The wireless charging pad will not work if any of the
four doors are open, even if the engine is running.
Opening the liftgate will not interfere with charging pad
operation.
Wireless charging is not as fast as when the phone is
connected to a wired charger.
The phone’s protective case must be removed when
placed on the wireless charging pad.
iPhone® 12 (including iPod®) is equipped with
software to protect the device from overheating. When
the software is active, the rate of charge is slowed
down to protect the device.
Phones must always be placed on the wireless
charging pad within the outline shown on the pad so
that its charging parts connect with the charging coils
of the system. Movement of the phone during charging
may prevent or slow the rate of charge.
Having multiple applications open on the phone while
charging will reduce the charging efficiency, and may
even shut down an application that is actively running
(i.e. Apple CarPlay®). This may also cause the phone to
overheat.
Wireless chargers may implement certain methods to
prevent the phone from overheating during charging
such as slowing down the rate of charge. In certain
instances, the device may shut down for a brief period
of time (when the device reaches a certain tempera-
ture). If this happens, it does not mean there is a fault
with the wireless charing pad. This may just be a
protective measure to prevent damage to the phone.
NOTE:
The wireless charging pad will not work if any of the
four doors are open, even if the engine is running.
Opening the liftgate will not interfere with charging pad
operation.
Using a phone case may interfere with wireless
charging.
CAUTION!
The key fob should not be placed on the charging pad
or within 6 inches (15 cm) of it. Doing so can cause
excessive heat buildup and damage to the fob. Placing
the fob in close proximity of the charging pad blocks the
fob from being detected by the vehicle and prevents the
vehicle from starting.
2
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOW CONTROLS
The window controls on the driver's door control all the
door windows.
Power Window Controls
The passenger door windows can also be operated by
using the single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel. The window controls will operate only when the
ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
To open the window part way, push the window switch
down briefly and release it when you want the window
to stop.
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
The timing is programmable within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 145.
AUTOMATIC WINDOW FEATURES
Auto-Down Feature
The driver and front passenger door power window
switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the window
switch down briefly, then release, and the window will go
down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down during the
Auto-Down operation, pull up or push the switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch up briefly and release; the window
will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-Up operation, push down or pull the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch briefly
and release it when you want the window to stop.
If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-closure, it
will reverse direction and then go back down. Remove the
obstacle and use the window switch again to close the
window.
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the
auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-closure. If
this happens, pull the switch lightly and hold to close the
window manually.
RESET AUTO-UP
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to open the
window completely and continue to hold the switch
down for an additional two seconds after the window
is fully open.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location
accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the
ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the windows while
operating the power window switches. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to clear
your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the
window path before closing.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim panel
allows you to disable the window controls on the rear
passenger doors. To disable the window controls, push
and release the window lockout switch (the indicator light
on the switch will turn on). To enable the window controls,
push and release the window lockout switch again (the
indicator light on the switch will turn off).
Window Lockout Switch
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open
or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence
and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE —
IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switches are located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switches
1 — Power Shade Switch
2 — Front Panel Open/Close Switch
3 — Front Panel Vent Switch
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
to children. Do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ON/RUN
position. Occupants, particularly unattended chil-
dren, can become entrapped by the power sunroof
while operating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat
belt properly and make sure all passengers are also
properly secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Do not use the sunroof and its related parts for
supporting and/or grabbing purposes. Serious
personal injury may result to fingers and other body
parts as well as damage to the sunroof.
2
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
OPENING AND CLOSING THE SUNROOF
The sunroof has two programmed open positions, comfort
stop position and full open position. The comfort stop
position has been optimized to minimize wind buffeting
when driving with side windows closed and sunroof open.
If the sunshade is in the closed position when initiating a
sunroof open or vent command the sunshade will
automatically open to the half open position prior to the
sunroof opening.
Express Open/Close
Push the switch to open and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will open to the comfort stop
(partially opened) position and automatically stop. Push
the switch and release it again, and the sunroof will open
to the full open position then automatically stop.
Pull the switch to close and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will completely close
automatically from any position.
During Express Open or Express Close operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Manual Open/Close
Push and hold the switch to open. The sunroof will open to
the comfort stop (partially opened) position and
automatically stop. Push the switch and hold it again, and
the sunroof will open to the full open position then
automatically stop.
Pull and hold the switch to completely close the sunroof
from any position.
Any release of the switch during open or close operation
will stop the sunroof movement. The sunroof will remain in
a partially opened position until the switch is operated and
held again.
VENTING SUNROOF
Push and release the vent switch within one-half second
and the sunroof will move from the closed position to the
vent position. This is called “Express Vent.” During Express
Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the
sunroof.
NOTE:
When the sunroof is in a full open or a partial open
position, Express Vent operation is not available. You must
push and hold the vent switch to cycle the sunroof from a
slide open position to the vent position. Sunroof
movement will stop if the switch is released prior to the
sunroof reaching the vent position.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE POWER
S
UNSHADE
The sunshade has two programmed open positions: half
open and full open. When opening the sunshade from the
closed position, the sunshade will always stop at the half
open position regardless of express or manual operation.
The switch must be pushed again to continue on to full
open position.
Express Open/Close
Push the sunshade switch to open and release it within
one-half second and the sunshade will open to the half
open position and stop automatically. Push the switch and
release it again, and the sunshade will open to the full
open position and stop automatically.
Pull the sunshade switch to close and release it within
one-half second. If the sunroof is in closed position, the
sunshade will full close automatically from any position.
If the sunroof is open or vented, the sunshade cannot be
closed beyond the half open position. Pulling the
sunshade switch when the sunshade is in the half open
position will automatically close sunroof prior to the
sunshade closing.
During Express Open or Express Close operation, any
movement of the sunshade switch will stop the shade.
Manual Open/Close
Push and hold the sunshade switch to open. The
sunshade will open to the half open position and stop
automatically. Push and hold the switch again, and the
sunshade will open to the full open position.
Pull and hold the sunshade switch to close. If the sunroof
is in closed position, the sunshade will fully close from any
position. If the sunroof is open or vented, the sunshade
will close to the half open position and stop. Pulling and
holding the switch again will close both the sunroof and
sunshade completely.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the
sunshade will remain in a partially opened position until
the switch is pushed again.
PINCH PROTECT FEATURE
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an
obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction
if this occurs. Next, pull the sunroof close switch and
release to Express Close.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in
Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and
the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
SUNROOF MAINTENANCE
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel. Periodically check for and clear out any
debris that may have collected in the tracks.
HOOD
OPENING THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located underneath the
driver’s side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Location (Underneath Instrument Panel)
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle. The safety latch
release lever is located behind the front edge of the
hood at the center. Reach in at the center of the hood
with a palm facing the ground. Once contact is made
with the safety latch release lever, push it toward the
passenger side of the vehicle to fully release the
hood.
Hood Safety Latch Release Lever Location
NOTE:
Vehicle must be at a stop and the gear selector must
be in PARK.
While lifting the hood, use both hands.
Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms are
not in motion and not in the lifted position.
CLOSING THE HOOD
Hoods equipped with gas props are closed from the point
where the props no longer hold the hood open.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood
to close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches
(30 cm) and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is
fully closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
2
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
LIFTGATE
UNLOCK/OPEN THE LIFTGATE
The liftgate may be released in one of several ways:
Key fob (if equipped with power liftgate)
Outside handle
Button on overhead console (if equipped with
power liftgate)
Hands-Free Liftgate (if equipped)
The overhead console switch and key fob (if equipped) will
release the liftgate when the liftgate is unlocked or locked.
The outside handle requires the liftgate to be unlocked.
Liftgate Entry
To Unlock The Liftgate
Use the key fob or the interior door unlock button on the
door panel to unlock the liftgate. The manual door locks on
the doors will not unlock the liftgate.
LOCK/CLOSE THE LIFTGATE
To manually close the liftgate, grab the liftgate closing
handle and pull in a downward motion to close the liftgate.
Liftgate Pull Handle/Closing Liftgate
NOTE:
Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be in possession
of the key fob because the liftgate may be locked.
To Lock The Liftgate
Use the key fob or the interior door lock button on the door
panel to lock the liftgate. The manual door locks on the
doors will not lock the liftgate.
POWER LIFTGATE — IF EQUIPPED
The power liftgate may be opened by pushing
the liftgate button on the key fob. Push the
liftgate button on the key fob twice within five
seconds to open or close the power liftgate.
You can also open the liftgate by pushing the electronic
liftgate release handle
Ú page 21.
Using any of the following ways:
When the liftgate is fully closed, the liftgate will open.
When the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate will close.
When the liftgate is moving, the liftgate will reverse.
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed by
pushing the liftgate button located on the front overhead
console. If the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate can be
closed by pushing the liftgate button located on the
left rear trim panel. If the liftgate is in motion, pushing the
button again will reverse the liftgate.
When the liftgate button on the key fob is pushed two
times, the turn signals will flash twice to signal that the
liftgate is opening or closing, and an audible chime can be
heard (if enabled in the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 145).
The key fob and the overhead console switch will open the
liftgate when the liftgate is locked. The outside handle
requires the liftgate to be unlocked. If the vehicle is
equipped with Passive Entry, and a valid Passive Entry key
fob is within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, pulling the outside
handle will unlock and open the liftgate.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
NOTE:
Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be in posses-
sion of the key fob because the liftgate may be locked.
Use the interior door lock/unlock button on the door
panel or the key fob to lock and unlock the liftgate. The
manual door locks on the doors and the exterior door
lock cylinder will not lock and unlock the liftgate.
The liftgate will either unlock along with the vehicle
doors, or it will need to be unlocked by pushing the
electronic liftgate release, depending on the selected
setting in the Uconnect system
Ú page 145.
The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h).
The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
below −22°F (−30°C) or temperatures above
150°F (65°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of
snow or ice from the liftgate before pushing any of
the power liftgate switches.
If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed or open position. After multiple
obstructions in the same cycle, the liftgate will auto-
matically stop and must be opened or closed manually.
There are pinch sensors attached to the side of the lift-
gate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips will
cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
The power liftgate must be in the full open position in
order for the rear liftgate close button, on the left rear
trim near the liftgate opening, to operate. If the liftgate
is not fully open, push the liftgate button on the key fob
to fully open the liftgate and then push it again to close.
If the electronic liftgate release handle is pushed a
second time while the power liftgate is opening, the
liftgate motor will disengage to allow manual operation.
If your liftgate is power closing and you put the vehicle
in gear, the liftgate will continue to power close.
However, vehicle movement may result in the detec-
tion of an obstruction.
Allow the power system to open the liftgate. Manually
pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the liftgate
obstacle detection feature and stop the power opera-
tion or reverse its direction.
HANDS-FREE LIFTGATE — IF EQUIPPED
Hands-Free Liftgate Activation Zone
To open or close the liftgate using hands-free activation,
use a straight in and out kicking motion under the vehicle
activation zone in the general location below the rear
license plate. The activation zone is about 1.8 ft (0.5 m)
from side to side. Do not move your foot sideways or in a
sweeping motion or the sensors may not detect the
motion.
NOTE:
Activation zone is the same for vehicles equipped with or
without a trailer tow package.
When a valid kicking motion is completed, the liftgate will
chime, the hazard lights will flash and the liftgate will
open after approximately one second, or close after
approximately three seconds. These settings can be
enabled or disabled through Uconnect Settings
Ú page 145.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes.
Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating
the vehicle.
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
Personal injury or cargo damage may occur if caught
in the path of the liftgate. Make sure the liftgate path
is clear before activating the liftgate.
2
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Opening or closing the Hands-Free Liftgate requires a
valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
door handle. If a valid Passive Entry key fob is not
within 5 ft (1.5 m), the liftgate will not respond to any
kicks.
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature may be turned on or
off through the Uconnect system
Ú page 145.
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature should be turned off
during jacking, tire changing, manual car wash, and
vehicle service.
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature can be activated by
any metallic object making a similar in-and-out motion
under the rear fascia/bumper, such as cleaning using
a metal broom.
The Hands-Free Liftgate will only operate when the
transmission is in PARK.
If anything obstructs the Hands-Free Liftgate while it is
opening or closing, the liftgate will automatically
reverse to the closed/open position, provided it meets
sufficient resistance.
There are pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along
these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the
open position.
If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop. If this occurs, the liftgate must be operated
manually.
The power liftgate will release, but not power open, in
temperatures below −12°F (−24°C). Be sure to
remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate
before opening the liftgate.
If the liftgate is left open for an extended period of time
(approximately one hour), the liftgate may need to be
closed manually to reset power liftgate functionality.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with
temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
NOTE:
Allow the power system to open the liftgate. Manually
pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the liftgate
obstacle detection feature and stop the power operation
or reverse its direction.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Load Floor
The cargo load floor system has a load capacity of
300 lb (136 kg).
Cargo Load Floor Positions
The cargo load floor can be adjusted to three different
levels to create more space in the cargo area.
These positions are: upper, center, and lower.
NOTE:
The lower position is not available in vehicles equipped
with either a compact spare tire, or a full size spare tire.
The center position is not available in vehicles equipped
with a full size spare tire.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes.
Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating
the vehicle.
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched
before driving away.
Personal injury or cargo damage may occur if caught
in the path of the liftgate. Make sure the liftgate path
is clear before activating the liftgate.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
To change the level of the load floor, pull upward on the
load floor handle, pull the floor outward, and place the
back of the floor into the desired position. Lower the front
of the floor into place.
Cargo Load Floor Positions
Raising The Load Floor
To raise the load floor for access to the Tire Service Kit, or
spare tire (if equipped), pull upward on the load floor
handle.
Do not raise the floor beyond the point of resistance. In
vehicles equipped with a power liftgate, forcing the floor
upward can damage the floor and vehicle’s trim panel.
Raised Load Floor — (Power Liftgate)
To fully raise the load floor, pull upward on the floor
handle, pull the floor outward, then position the floor
upright with the bottom fitting on top of the floor
positioning brackets. Push the top of the floor down firmly
to secure it in this position.
Fully Raised Load Floor Position
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be
folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still
maintains some rear seating room
Ú page 26.
1 — Upper Position
2 — Center Position
3 — Lower Position
1 — Raised Floor Maximum Height
2 — Raised Load Floor
2
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks And Loops
The tie-downs located on the cargo area floor should be
used to secure loads safely when the vehicle is moving.
Cargo tie-down loops are located on the trim panels.
Rear Storage Bins
The rear storage bins are located in the rear of the vehicle
on the sides of the load floor.
Rear Storage Bin
WARNING!
Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child seat
tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident, a tie-down
could pull loose and allow the child seat to come
loose. A child could be badly injured. Use only the
anchors provided for child seat tethers.
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal
injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
Place as much cargo as possible in front of the
rear axle. Too much weight or improperly placed
weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the
vehicle to sway.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or accident.
WARNING!
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
(Continued)
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a
luggage rack, must not exceed 150 lb (68 kg), and it
should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is
placed on the roof rack. Check the straps frequently to
be sure that the load remains securely attached.
NOTE:
Crossbars can be purchased at your authorized dealer
through Mopar® parts.
External racks do not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant
and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the
luggage rack, does not exceed the maximum vehicle load
capacity.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle,
particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury
or property damage. Follow the roof rack cautions when
carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity. Always
distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and
secure the load appropriately.
Long loads, which extend over the windshield, should
be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.
Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward lift. It is recom-
mended to not carry large flat loads, such as wood
panels or surfboards, which may result in damage to
the cargo or your vehicle.
Load should always be secured to crossbars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supple-
mentary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting
mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the straps
frequently to be sure that the load remains securely
attached.
CAUTION!
2
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 67
3
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
D
ESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display
Ú page 70.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal range
indicates that the engine cooling system is oper-
ating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather or up
mountain grades. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating
range.
5. Fuel Gauge
The gauge shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel door
is located.
NOTE:
The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check when the
ignition is first cycled.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others
could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. It is
recommended to call an authorized dealer for service if
your vehicle overheats
Ú page 244.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized
dealer for service.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 69
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
3
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
D
ESCRIPTIONS
1. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal range
indicates that the engine cooling system is oper-
ating satisfactorily.
The pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
2. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute (RPM x 1000).
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel door
is located.
NOTE:
The Instrument Cluster Warning Indicators will illuminate
briefly for a bulb check when the ignition is first cycled.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will
activate the display for viewing, and display the total miles,
or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument cluster
display is designed to display important information about
your vehicle’s systems and features. Using the driver
interactive display located on the instrument panel, your
instrument cluster display can show you how systems are
working and give you warnings when they aren’t. The
steering wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll
through and enter the main menus and submenus. You
can access the specific information you want and make
selections and adjustments.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
L
OCATION AND CONTROLS
The instrument cluster display features a driver interactive
display that is located in the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
Depending on your vehicle trim, your instrument cluster
display may vary.
Instrument Cluster Display Location and Controls
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others
could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. It is
recommended to call an authorized dealer for service if
your vehicle overheats
Ú page 244.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized
dealer for service.
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 71
The systems allow the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Premium Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
Up Arrow Button
Push and release the
up arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu and submenus.
OK Button
Push the
OK button to access/select the information
screens or submenu screens of a main menu item.
Push and hold the
OK button for one second to reset
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
Menu Button — If Equipped
Push the
Menu button to access/select the informa-
tion screens or submenu screens of the Home Screen
display. Push and hold the
OK button to enter edit
mode.
Left Arrow Button
Push and release the
left arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a main
menu item.
Down Arrow Button
Push and release the
down arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu and submenus.
Right Arrow Button
Push and release the
right arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a main
menu item.
Display Options — If Equipped
Holding
OK will also allow you to change your display to
Digital or Analog.
Digital theme will be the default theme
Menu screen times out after 10 seconds. Press
OK to
reactivate
Speedometer must always be present
Relevant warning notifications and other pop-up info
will still be displayed in the main screen area (In this
case the speed moves to the top)
1 — Up Arrow Button
2 — OK Button
3 — Menu Button
4 — Left Arrow Button
5 — Down Arrow Button
6 — Right Arrow Button
3
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Custom Tile Configuration
To customize the instrument cluster further, you are able
to select up to five tiles to display information based on
your needs.
Press the
MENU button for the Home Screen display
Menu Button
Navigate Left or Right to highlight desired tile
Press
OK to select the tile and navigate to the selected
submenu and press
OK again to add your selection to
your tile view
If equipped, the main menu options of the home
screen are Navigation, Vehicle Info, Driver Info, Audio,
and Off Road
You can customize your Instrument Cluster Display with up
to five tiles that may consist of the following:
Custom Tile Screen
NOTE:
These options may vary based on your vehicle trim level.
Home Screen Options
Navigation — If Equipped
Route Set / Route Not Set
Trip A / Trip B
Vehicle Info
Coolant Temp
Trans Temp
Oil Temp
Oil Pressure
Battery Voltage
Oil Life
Tire Pressure
Fuel Economy
Driver Info — If Equipped
Posted Speed Limit Sign
Driver Assist
Audio
Audio Info
Off Road — If Equipped
Selec-Terrain / Air Suspension Status
Steering Angle
Pitch
Roll
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 73
The instrument cluster display is located in the center
portion of the cluster and consist of multiple sections:
Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will illumi-
nate in gray under normal conditions, yellow for non
critical warnings, red for critical warnings, and white for
on demand information.
Submenu Dots — Whenever there are submenus avail-
able, the position within the submenus is shown here.
Reconfigurable Telltales/Information
Gear Selector Status (PRND)
Driver Interactive Display (Compass, Temp, Range to
Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average Fuel Economy, Current
Fuel Economy and Time)
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) Status — If Equipped
OIL CHANGE RESET
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
engine oil change indicator system.
The “Oil Change Due” message will
display in the instrument cluster
display for five seconds after a
single chime has sounded, to indi-
cate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine
oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate,
dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display
each time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position.
To reset the oil change indicator after performing the
scheduled maintenance, refer to the following procedure:
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within ten seconds.
3. Cycle the ignition to the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the
vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset.
If necessary, repeat this procedure.
DISPLAY AND MESSAGES — IF EQUIPPED
Includes the following, but not limited to:
Front Seat Belts Unbuckled Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled
Traction Control Off Washer Fluid Low Oil Pressure Low
Oil Change Due Fuel Low Service Anti-lock Brake System
Service Electronic Throttle Control Service Power Steering Cruise Off
Cruise Ready ACC Override Cruise Set To XXX mph or km/h
Service Shifter Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) Service Tire Pressure System
Park Brake Engaged Brake Fluid Low Engine Temperature Hot
Lights On Right Front Turn Signal Light Out Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out
Left Front Turn Signal Light Out Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out Ignition or Accessory On
Vehicle Not In Park Remote Start Active Push Start Button Remote Start Canceled Fuel Low
3
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white or yellow telltales area on the left, and the green or
red telltales area on the right.
The instrument cluster display will normally display the
main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the
main menu. The main display area also displays pop-up
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible
warning or information messages. These pop-up
messages fall into several categories:
Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for
five seconds and then returns to the previous screen.
Most of the messages of this type are then stored (as
long as the condition that activated it remains active)
and can be reviewed from the “Messages” main menu
item. Examples of this message type are “Right Front
Turn Signal Lamp Out” and “Low Tire Pressure.”
Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Exam-
ples of this message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn
signal is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver leaves the
vehicle with the lights on).
Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the igni-
tion is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type
are “Remote Start Canceled - Door Ajar” and “Press
Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start.”
Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for
five seconds and then returns to the previous screen.
An example of this message type is “Automatic High
Beams On.”
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MENU
I
TEMS
The instrument cluster display can be used to view the
main menu items for several features. Use the
up and
down arrow buttons to scroll through the driver
interactive display menu options until the desired menu is
reached.
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display menu items display in the
center of the instrument cluster. Menu items may vary
depending on your vehicle features.
Remote Start Canceled Door Open Remote Start Canceled Hood Open Remote Start Canceled Liftgate Open
Remote Start Canceled Time Expired Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset Service Air Bag System
Service Air Bag Warning Light Door(s) Open Service Transmission
Liftgate Open Hood Open Shift Not Allowed
Vehicle Speed Too High To Shift to D Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to R Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 75
Main Menu
DRIVER INFO— IF EQUIPPED
Base/Midline Cluster
Speedometer
Push and release the
up or down arrow button
until the Speedometer Menu item is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
OK button to change the speedometer scale from
MPH to km/h (or vice versa).
Premium Cluster
Speedometer
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until
the Speedometer Menu item is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
OK button to change the speedometer scale from
MPH to km/h (or vice versa).
Driver Assist
Push and release the
up
or
down
arrow button until
the Driver Assist menu icon is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the
OK
button to select. The
Driver Assist screen indicates the current status of ACC, Active
Lane Management and Highway Assist/Assist+/Pilot. Push
and release the
OK
button to again to change between
Zoomed In and Zoomed Out view (“Press OK to Zoom In” will
display when in Zoomed Out view/“Press OK to Zoom Out” will
display when in Zoomed In view).
VEHICLE INFO (CUSTOMER INFORMATION
FEATURES)
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
the Vehicle Info Menu item is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the
left or right
arrow button to cycle through the Vehicle Info submenus
and follow the prompts on each screen as needed.
Base/Midline Cluster
1.
Tire Pressure
If tire pressure is
OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner
of the ICON.
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire
To XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the
tire pressure values in each corner of the ICON
with the pressure value of the low tire displayed in
a different color than the other tire pressure value.
If the Tire Pressure system requires service,
“Service Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot
be reset
Ú page 177.
2.
Coolant Temperature
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
3.
Transmission Temperature — Automatic
Transmission Only
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
4.
Oil Temperature
Displays the level of oil temperature.
5.
Battery Voltage
Displays the actual battery voltage.
Premium Cluster
Fuel Economy
Average Fuel Economy
Current Fuel Economy
Range To Empty
Gauge Summary
Coolant Temp
Trans Temp
Oil Temp
Oil Pressure
Battery Voltage
3
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tire Pressure
If tire pressure is
OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner
of the ICON.
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire
To XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON and the
tire pressure values in each corner of the ICON
with the pressure value of the low tire displayed in
a different color than the other tire pressure value.
If the Tire Pressure system requires service,
“Service Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot
be reset
Ú page 177.
Stop/Start Status
Display the status of the Stop/Start system.
DRIVER ASSIST
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
the Driver Assist menu title is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display.
The instrument cluster display displays the current ACC
system settings. The information displayed depends on
ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button
(located on the steering wheel) until one of the following
displays in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Push and release the SET + or the SET- button (located on
the steering wheel) and the following will display in the
instrument cluster display:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activity
occurs, which may include any of the following:
Distance Setting Change
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity
Ú page 105.
The instrument cluster display displays the current Active
Lane Management system settings. The information
displayed depends on Active Lane Management system
status and the conditions that need to be met
Ú page 128.
FUEL ECONOMY
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
the Fuel Economy menu title is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. Push and hold the
OK button to reset
average fuel economy feature.
Range – The display shows the estimated distance
(mi or km) that can be traveled with the fuel remaining
in the tank. When the Range value is less than 30 miles
(48 km) estimated driving distance, the Range display
will change to a “LOW FUEL” message. Adding a
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
“LOW FUEL” message and a new Range value will
display. Range cannot be reset through the
OK button.
NOTE:
Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will
greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle,
regardless of the Range displayed value.
Average – The display shows the average fuel economy
(MPG, or L/100 km, or km/L) since the last reset.
Current – This display shows the current fuel economy
(MPG, or L/100 km, or km/L) while driving.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 77
TRIP INFO
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
the Trip menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster
display. Toggle the
left or right arrow button to
select Trip A or Trip B. The Trip information will display the
following:
Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km) traveled
for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average fuel
economy (MPG or L/100 km or km/L) of Trip A or
Trip B since the last reset.
Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of travel
since Trip A or Trip B has been reset.
Hold the
OK button to reset feature information.
OFF ROAD — IF EQUIPPED
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
the Off Road Menu icon/title is highlighted. Push the
left or right arrow button to scroll the submenus.
Terrain Status
Selec-Terrain Status
STOP/START – IF EQUIPPED
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
the Stop/Start menu title is displayed in the instrument
cluster display.
AUDIO
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
the Audio menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
STORED MESSAGES
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
the Messages Menu Icon is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. This feature shows the number of stored
warning messages. Pushing the
left or right arrow
button will allow you to scroll through the stored
messages.
SCREEN SETUP
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Screen Setup Menu Icon/Title is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display. Push and release the
OK button to enter the submenus and follow the prompts
on the screen as needed. The Screen Setup feature allows
you to change what information is displayed in the
instrument cluster as well as the location that information
is displayed.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Upper Left or Upper Right
None Range To Empty Date
Outside Temp Current Economy
Ignition State
(Base/Midline
Cluster only)
Time Compass
Average
Economy
Favorites
Premium Cluster Only
Driver Info Vehicle Info Trip
Off Road Audio
Stored
Messages
Settings
3
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Restore Defaults
Yes
No
Odometer- Premium Cluster Only
Show
Hide
VEHICLE SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
the Vehicle Setup Menu item is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. This menu item allows you to
change the settings for the following:
Display
Navigation Repetition
Security
Passenger Airbag
Seat Belt Reminder
Safety and Assistance
Hill Start Assist
NOTE:
Most vehicle settings will be moved into the radio if a
touchscreen radio is present
Ú page 145.
Display
By selecting Display, the following settings can be
selected:
Language: select the language in which to display the
information/warnings.
Phone Repetition: displays information relating to the
phone mode.
Units
By selecting Units, the unit of measurement to use for
displaying various values can be set. Possible options are:
US
Metric
Custom: allows individual changes of units for
temperature, distance, consumption, and tire pres-
sure.
Clock And Date
By selecting Clock and Date, the time and date can be set.
Possible options are:
Set Time: adjust hours/minutes
Set Format: adjust the time format “12h” (12 hours) or
“24h” (24 hours)
Set Date: adjust day/month/year
Security
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD): a selection of Passenger
Air Bag Disable (ON/OFF) may be made if a child restraint
must be installed in the front seat.
Safety And Assistance
By selecting the item Safety and Assistance, the following
adjustments can be made:
ParkSense (If Equipped): a selection of the type of
information provided by ParkSense
Front ParkSense Volume (If Equipped): selection of the
volume of the beeps provided by the front ParkSense
Rear ParkSense Volume (If Equipped): selection of the
volume of the beeps provided by the rear ParkSense
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) (If Equipped): a selec-
tion of operating modes of the system Forward Colli-
sion Warning Plus
FCW Sensitivity (If Equipped): a selection of the “readi-
ness” of intervention of the Forward Collision Warning
Plus system, based on the distance to the obstacle
Rain Sensing Wipers (If Equipped): enabling/disabling
the automatic operation of wipers in the event of rain
Active Lane Management Force (If Equipped): selection
of the force to be applied to the steering wheel to put
the car in the roadway through the system of electrical
drive, in case of operation of the system Active Lane
Management
Active Lane Management Warning (If Equipped): a
selection of the “readiness” of intervention of Active
Lane Management
Center
(Base/Midline Cluster Only)
None Range to Empty Date
Average
Economy
Current Economy Outside Temp
Compass Menu Title Audio Info
Time Trip A Distance Speedometer
Trip B Distance
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 79
Buzzer Volume: There are 4 options: Off, Low, Medium,
Loud
Brake Service (If Equipped): activation of the procedure
to carry out braking system maintenance
Auto Park Brake (If Equipped): enable/disable auto
insertion of the Electric Park Brake
Hill Start Assist: Activation/Deactivation of the Hill Start
Assist system
Lights — If Equipped
By selecting Lights, the following adjustments can be
made:
Ambient Lights (If Equipped): adjust the sensitivity of
lighting in the doors and overhead console
Lights Off Delay: set the delay for headlight shutoff
after engine shutoff
Headlight Sensitivity: adjust the sensitivity of headlight
brightness
Greeting Lights: activate the direction indicators when
unlocking the doors
Daytime Lights (If Equipped): activate/deactivate the
daytime running lights
Cornering Lights (If Equipped): activate/deactivate the
cornering lights
Auto High Beam (If Equipped): activate/deactivate the
automatic high beam headlights
Doors And Locks
By selecting Doors and Locks, the following adjustments
can be made:
Auto Unlock Doors: automatic unlocking of the doors
when exiting the vehicle
Lights with Lock: activate the direction indicators when
locking the doors
Horn With Remote Lock: activate/deactivate the horn
when pressing the lock button on the key. The options
are “Off”, “First Press”, and “Second Press”
Horn With Remote Start (If Equipped): activate/deacti-
vate the horn at the Remote Starting of the engine with
the key
Door Unlock: allow you to choose whether to unlock all
the doors or only the driver’s side door on the first push
of the unlock button on the key
Auto Driver Comfort (If Equipped): activate/deactivate
automatic climate control during vehicle starts
Key in Memory (If Equipped): activate/deactivate
memory linked to a key
Compass
By selecting Compass, the following settings can be
changed:
Calibration (If Equipped)
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic, and the cluster will
display dashes (- -) until the compass is calibrated. You
may also calibrate the compass by completing one or
more 360 degree turns (in an area free from large metal
or metallic objects) until the dashes (- -) displayed in the
instrument cluster display turns off. The compass will now
function normally.
Variance (If Equipped)
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set,
the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences and provide the most accurate compass
heading.
Compass Variance Map
3
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER
M
ODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD
R
EDUCTION ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor
(IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical
system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical
load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving
time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running.
It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current
drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message
“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear
in the instrument cluster display.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low
state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at
a rate that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from load reduc-
tion. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
charging system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate
a problem with the charging system
Ú page 82.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped),
and vehicle functions which can be effected by load
reduction:
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
150W Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the
following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
power to the vehicle system because the electrical
loads are larger than the capability of charging system.
The charging system is still functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights, over-
loaded power outlets +12 Volts, 150W, USB ports)
during certain driving conditions (city driving, towing,
frequent stopping).
Installing options like additional lights, upfitter elec-
trical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar
devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
(weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period with the
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers,
+12 Volts portable appliances like vacuum cleaners,
game consoles and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or
“Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
Check what may be plugged into power outlets
+12 Volts, 150W, USB ports
Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed
(additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories,
audio systems, alarms) and review specifications if
any (load and Ignition Off Draw currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving
time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if the
message is still present during consecutive trips and
the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did
not help to identify the cause.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 81
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/
or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are
indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the
information contained in the Owner’s Manual, which you
are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to
the information in this chapter in the event of a failure
indication. All active telltales will display first if applicable.
The system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault with the air bag, and will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. This
light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with
the air bag has been detected, it will stay on until the fault
is cleared. If the light is either not on during startup, stays
on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake light
turns on it may indicate that the parking brake
is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is
a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake,
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering
maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The
vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
3
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays on
while the engine is running, there may be a
malfunction with the charging system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical
system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is
ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Drowsiness Detected Warning Light—
If Equipped
Driver drowsiness detection helps to avoid
crashes caused by fatigue by advising drivers
to take a break in time. Once Drowsy Driver is
detected, A pop-up will display continuously
until the driver presses the
OK button to clear.
Once the pop-up message is cleared, it is stored until the
condition is no longer true.
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there's a
fault with the EPS system Ú page 101.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
problem with the ETC system. If a problem is
detected while the vehicle is running, the light
will either stay on or flash depending on the
nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle
is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the
light remains on with the vehicle running, your vehicle will
usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake pedals
are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light
does not come on during starting, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to warn of an
overheated engine condition. If the engine
coolant temperature is too high, this light will
illuminate and a single chime will sound.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop
the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) system is on, turn
it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N) and
idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return
to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service
Ú page 228.
Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
hood is left open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 83
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate low
engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while
driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the engine as
soon as possible, and contact an authorized
dealer. A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the
engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns
on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off
the engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
temperature to return to normal levels.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver or
passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When the
ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position
and if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if
the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled,
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on
continuously and a chime will sound
Ú page 180.
Transmission Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate (together with a
message in the instrument cluster display and
a buzzer) to indicate a transmission fault.
Contact an authorized dealer if the message
remains after restarting the engine.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to warn of a
high transmission fluid temperature. This may
occur with strenuous usage such as trailer
towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle
and run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the
transmission in PARK or NEUTRAL, until the light turns off.
Once the light turns off, you may continue to drive
normally.
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the Vehicle
Security system is arming, and then will flash
slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS. The light
will turn on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long
as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then
the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and service is required as soon as possible.
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not
also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN position, have the brake system inspected
by an authorized dealer.
Electric Park Brake Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
the Electric Park Brake is not functioning
properly and service is required.
Contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated
you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature
Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe
transmission damage or transmission failure.
3
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the
ESC system is Active. The ESC Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, and
when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine
running. If the ESC Indicator Light comes on continuously
with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected
in the ESC system. If this warning light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator Light
come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an
ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the
ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off
previously.
Fuel Cutoff Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate after an
accident has occurred, and the system has
shut the fuel off.
Active Lane Management Warning Light —
If Equipped
The Active Lane Management Warning Light
will be solid yellow when the vehicle is
approaching a lane marker. The warning light
will flash when the vehicle is crossing the
lane marker.
Service Active Lane Management Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Active Lane Management system is not
operating and requires service. Please see an
authorized dealer.
Low Coolant Level Warning Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the vehicle
coolant level is low
Ú page 244.
Low Fuel Warning Light
Depending on whether the tank size is 13.5 gal
(51 L) or 15.8 gal (60 L), the Low Fuel Indicator
Light will turn on when the fuel level goes below
1.5 gal (5.6 L) or 1.7 gal (6.6 L) respectively.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator (MIL)
Warning Light
The MIL is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors engine and
automatic transmission control systems. This
warning light will illuminate when the ignition is
in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the ignition switch from
OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine
start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on
through several typical driving styles. In most situations,
the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 85
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal a fault
with the 4WD system. If the light stays on or
comes on during driving, it means that the 4WD
system is not functioning properly and that
service is required. We recommend you drive to the
nearest service center and have the vehicle serviced
immediately.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault in the Forward Collision Warning System.
Contact an authorized dealer for service
Ú page 175.
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start system is not functioning properly
and service is required. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light — If Equipped
The warning light switches on and a message is
displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is
lower than the recommended value and/or
that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not
be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned
previously, the display will show the indications
corresponding to each tire.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating conditions.
This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over
flammable substances such as dry plants, wood,
cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious
injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control
system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
3
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly
underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When
the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
Towing Hook Breakdown Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light illuminates when there is a failure
with the tow hook. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the 4WD Low mode. The front and rear
driveshafts are mechanically locked together
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed. Low range provides a greater gear
reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels
Ú page 100.
4WD Lock Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in the 4WD Lock mode. The front and rear
driveshafts are mechanically locked together,
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed
Ú page 100.
Auto HOLD! Fault Indicator Light —
If Equipped
The Auto HOLD! Fault Indicator light will
illuminate if a fault is detected, it will be
indicated by a yellow HOLD! indicator light that
will stay on as long as the fault condition exists.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you
take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 87
Active Speed Limiter Fault Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal when
there is a fault detected with the Active Speed
Limiter.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to warn you of a
possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate
that Forward Collision Warning is off.
Immobilizer Fail/VPS Electrical Alarm
Indicator Light
This telltale will illuminate when the Vehicle
Security system has detected an attempt to
break into the vehicle.
NOTE:
After cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Warning Light could illuminate if a
problem with the system is detected. This condition will
result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Auto HOLD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Auto HOLD keeps your vehicle at a complete
stop without you having to keep your foot
on the brake pedal. Once engaged a green
HOLD indicator will appear in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
Active Lane Management Indicator Light —
If Equipped
The Active Lane Management indicator light
illuminates solid green when both lane
markings have been detected and the system
is “armed” and ready to provide visual and
torque warnings if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
parking lights or headlights are turned on.
Front Fog Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
front fog lights are on
Ú page 38.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated,
the turn signal indicator will flash
independently and the corresponding exterior
turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can
be activated when the multifunction lever is moved
down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light —
If Equipped With A Premium Instrument
Cluster
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Cruise Control is set to the desired speed
Ú page 104.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode.
3
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
(Continued)
Automatic High Beam Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator shows that the automatic high
beam headlights are on
Ú page 38.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Active Lane Management Indicator Light —
If Equipped
When the Active Lane Management system is
ON, but not armed, the Active Lane
Management indicator light illuminates solid
white. This occurs when only left, right, or
neither lane line has been detected. If a single lane line is
detected, the system is ready to provide only visual
warnings if an unintentional lane departure occurs on
the detected lane line
Ú page 128.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator shows when the HDC feature is
turned on. The light will be on solid when HDC
is armed. HDC can only be armed when the
transfer case is in the 4WD Low position and
the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these
conditions are not met while attempting to use the HDC
feature, the HDC indicator light will flash on/off.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light —
If Equipped With A Premium Instrument
Cluster
This light will turn on when the Cruise Control
has been turned on, but not set
Ú page 104.
Cruise Control SET Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Cruise Control is set
Ú page 104.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the high beam headlights are on. With the
low beams activated, push the multifunction
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to
turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever
rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the
high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever toward
you for a temporary high beam on, “flash to pass”
scenario.
GRAY INDICATOR LIGHTS
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light —
If Equipped With Base Instrument Cluster
This light will turn on when the Cruise Control
has been turned on, but not set
Ú page 104.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as emissions well
within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although
your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing,
see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further
damage to the emission control system. It could also
affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle
must be serviced before any emissions tests can
be performed.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 89
(Continued)
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
C
YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have an OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information related to
the performance of your emissions controls. Authorized
service technicians may need to access this information to
assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system
Ú page 144.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning
and is not on when the engine is running, and
that the OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may
not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a depleted battery or a battery
replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this
test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle's OBD II system is
not ready and you
should
not proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illu-
minated until you place the ignition in the off posi-
tion or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle's OBD II system is
ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is
not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the previously mentioned test
routine may then indicate that the system is
now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle
operation you should have your vehicle serviced before
going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your
vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your
vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD II
connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
CAUTION!
Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including
personal information.
WARNING!
3
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the NEUTRAL or
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
NORMAL STARTING
Place the ignition switch in the START position and release
when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within
10 seconds, place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF
position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
Tip Start Feature
Place the ignition switch in the START position and release
it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will
continue to run, and will automatically disengage itself
when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start,
place the ignition switch in the OFF position, wait 10 to
15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Automatic Transmission
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
Keyless Enter ’n Go™ Functions — Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system starts the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to
start, the starter will disengage automatically after
10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the ENGINE START/STOP
button again.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter ’n Go™ in the ON/RUN position. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or
DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
STARTING AND OPERATING 91
Keyless Enter ’n Go™ — With Driver’s Foot Off The Brake
Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position)
The Keyless Enter ’n Go™ feature operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, ON/RUN, and
START. To change the ignition switch positions without
starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow, these
steps starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position:
1. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
change the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to change the ignition switch to the OFF position.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
(B
ELOW –22°F OR −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater
(available from an authorized dealer) is recommended.
EXTENDED PARK STARTING
NOTE:
Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has not
been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the
battery to ensure a full battery charge during the
crank cycle.
2. Place the ignition in the START position and release it
when the engine starts. For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
ignition systems, press and hold the brake pedal
while pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, place
the ignition in the OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds
to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the
“Extended Park Starting” procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat
the procedure.
AFTER STARTING — WARMING UP THE
E
NGINE
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure, and has not experienced an
Extended Park condition as identified in “Extended Park
Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there.
Crank the engine for no more than 15 seconds. This
should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
Leave the ignition key in the ON/RUN position, release the
accelerator pedal and repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
continuously for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of
start can be dangerous if done improperly
Ú page 225.
4
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 STARTING AND OPERATING
STOPPING THE ENGINE
Vehicles Equipped With Electronic Key
(Keyless Enter ’n Go™):
To shut off the engine with vehicle speed greater than
5 mph (8 km/h), you must push and hold the ignition or
push the ENGINE START/STOP button three times
consecutively within a few seconds. The engine will shut
down, and the ignition will be placed in the ON/RUN
position.
Turning off the car (placing the ignition from the ON/RUN
position to the OFF position), the power supply to the
accessories are maintained for a period of three minutes.
Opening the driver’s side door with the ignition in ON/RUN
will sound a short chime that reminds the driver to place
the ignition to OFF.
When the ignition is in the OFF position, the window
switches remain active for three minutes. Opening a
front door will cancel this function.
After severe driving, idle the engine to allow the
temperature inside the engine compartment to cool
before shutting off the engine.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be
detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the
recommended viscosity and quality grades
Ú page 284.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered a normal part of the break-in and not inter-
preted as a problem.
PARK BRAKE
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an EPB system that offers
simple operation, and some additional features that make
the parking brake more convenient and useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the
vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the
vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is applied.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
You can engage the parking brake in two ways:
Manually, by applying the EPB switch.
Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake feature
in the Customer Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect settings
Ú page 145.
The EPB switch is located in the center console.
Electric Park Brake Switch
To apply the parking brake manually, pull up on the switch
momentarily. You may hear a sound from the back of the
vehicle while the parking brake engages. Once the parking
brake is fully engaged, the BRAKE Warning Light in the
instrument cluster and an indicator on the switch will
illuminate. If your foot is on the brake pedal while you
apply the parking brake, you may notice a small amount of
brake pedal movement. The parking brake can be applied
even when the ignition switch is OFF. The Brake Warning
Light will not illuminate and can only be released when the
ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in
the engine or damage may result.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
STARTING AND OPERATING 93
(Continued)
NOTE:
The EPB Warning Light will illuminate if the EPB switch is
held for longer than 60 seconds in either the released or
applied position. The light will extinguish upon releasing
the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the parking
brake will automatically engage whenever the
transmission is placed into PARK. If your foot is on the
brake pedal, you may notice a small amount of brake
pedal movement while the parking brake is engaging.
The parking brake will release automatically when the
ignition switch is ON/RUN, the transmission is in DRIVE or
REVERSE, the driver’s seat belt is buckled, and an attempt
is made to drive away.
To release the parking brake manually, the ignition switch
must be in the ON/RUN position. Put your foot on the
brake pedal, then push the EPB switch down momentarily.
You may hear a sound from the back of the car while the
parking brake disengages. You may also notice a small
amount of movement in the brake pedal. Once the parking
brake is fully disengaged, the BRAKE Warning Light in the
instrument cluster and the LED indicator on the switch will
extinguish.
NOTE:
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from
the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking brake before
placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
to move the gear selector out of PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the
vehicle.
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to
engage the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion,
maintain upward pressure on the EPB switch for as long as
engagement is desired. The BRAKE Warning Light will
illuminate, and a continuous chime will sound. The rear
stop lamps will also be illuminated automatically while the
vehicle remains in motion.
To disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is in
motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a
complete stop using the parking brake, when the vehicle
reaches approximately 3 mph, (5 km/h) the parking brake
will remain engaged.
WARNING!
Do not rely on the parking brake to operate effec-
tively if the rear brakes have been immersed in water
or mud.
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter ’n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
4
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 STARTING AND OPERATING
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB system, a
yellow EPB Warning Light will illuminate. This may be
accompanied by the BRAKE Warning Light flashing. In this
event, urgent service of the EPB system is required. Do not
rely on the parking brake to hold the vehicle stationary.
Auto Park Brake
The EPB can be programmed to be applied automatically
whenever the vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h)
and the transmission is placed in PARK. Auto Park Brake
is enabled and disabled by customer selection through the
Customer Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect Settings
Ú page 145.
Any single Auto Park Brake application can be bypassed by
pushing the EPB switch to the release position while the
transmission is placed in PARK and the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the EPB system that will
engage the parking brake automatically if the vehicle is
left unsecured while the ignition switch is in ON/RUN.
For automatic transmissions, the EPB will automatically
engage if all of the following conditions are met:
Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h).
There is no attempt to press the brake pedal and
accelerator pedal.
The seat belt is unbuckled.
The driver’s door is open.
The vehicle is not in the PARK position.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing the
EPB switch while the driver’s door is open and the brake
pedal is pressed. Once manually bypassed, SafeHold will
be enabled again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph
(20 km/h) or the ignition is turned to the OFF position and
back to ON/RUN again.
Auto Hold — If Equipped
Auto Hold is a comfort feature that allows the driver to
remove their foot from the brake pedal once the vehicle
has come to a stop. The vehicle must be held at a
standstill for a predetermined amount of time by hydraulic
braking. The EPB will then engage and continue to hold
the vehicle at a stop until the driver applies the accelerator
pedal. Auto Hold can be activated or deactivated by
pushing the HOLD button located on the switch bank.
Auto Hold Switch
The following conditions must be met for Auto Hold to
activate:
Driver’s door is closed
Driver's seat belt is fastened
Vehicle is at a standstill
Forward gear is selected
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is not engaged
EPB is not applied
ParkSense Active Park Assist System auto parking
maneuver is not activated
WARNING!
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged, or
repeated use of the parking brake to slow the vehicle,
may cause serious damage to the brake system.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
STARTING AND OPERATING 95
(Continued)
(Continued)
Brake Service Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by an
authorized dealer.
You should only make repairs for which you have the
knowledge and the right equipment. You should only enter
Brake Service Mode during brake service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for
you or your technician to push the rear piston into the rear
caliper bore. With the EPB system, this can only be done
after retracting the EPB actuator. The actuator retraction
can be done easily by entering the Brake Service Mode
through the Uconnect Settings in your vehicle. This
menu-based system will guide you through the steps
necessary to retract the EPB actuator in order to perform
rear brake service.
Service Mode has requirements that must be met in order
to be activated:
The vehicle must be at a standstill.
The parking brake must be disabled.
The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
The EPB switch not activated.
The vehicle in ignition ON/RUN position.
The brake pedal not pressed.
While in Service Mode, the EPB Warning Light will flash
continuously while the ignition switch is ON/RUN.
NOTE:
A dedicated message will appear in the instrument cluster
display if Brake Service Mode cannot be activated.
When brake service work is complete, the following steps
must be followed to reset the parking brake system to
normal operation:
Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
Apply the EPB Switch.
NOTE:
A dedicated message will appear in the instrument cluster
display if Brake Service Mode cannot be deactivated.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out
of PARK.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Do only that service work for which you have
the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK (P) position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exiting
the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL (N) if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
The vehicle may not engage a newly selected gear
when shifting between PARK, REVERSE (R), or
DRIVE (D) if the vehicle is moving while shifting.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the igni-
tion is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
WARNING!
4
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 STARTING AND OPERATING
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK (P) before
the ignition can be turned to the OFF position. This helps
the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without
placing the transmission in PARK. This system also locks
the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in the
OFF position.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK (BTSI) SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI that holds the
transmission gear selector in PARK (P) unless the brakes
are applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the
ignition must be in the ON/RUN position (whether the
engine is running or not), and the brake pedal must be
pressed. The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift
from NEUTRAL (N) into DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R) when the
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
8-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both
beside the gear selector and in the instrument cluster.
To select a gear range, push the lock button on the gear
selector and move the selector rearward or forward. You
must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission
out of PARK (P) (or NEUTRAL (N), when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds). Select the DRIVE (D)
range for normal driving.
NOTE:
The transmission electronics are self-calibrating;
therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be
somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred
miles (kilometers).
In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector
position and the actual transmission gear (for
example, driver selects REVERSE (R) while driving
forward), the position indicator will blink continuously
until the selector is returned to the proper position, or
the requested shift can be completed.
The electronically controlled transmission adapts its shift
schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
and road conditions.
The 8-speed transmission has been developed to meet the
needs of current and future FWD/AWD vehicles. Software
and calibration is refined to optimize the customer’s driving
experience and fuel economy. By design, some vehicle and
driveline combinations utilize NINTH gear only in very
specific driving situations and conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ON/RUN position. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or
DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
STARTING AND OPERATING 97
(Continued)
The transmission gear selector provides PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick (+/-) shift positions.
Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift
control Ú page 99. Moving the gear selector into the
AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position)
activates AutoStick mode, providing manual shift control
and displaying the current gear in the instrument cluster
(as 1, 2, 3, etc.). Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or
rearward (+) while in the AutoStick position will manually
select the transmission gear.
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward) it
is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the
DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the transmission gear
(1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move
the gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position)
for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Selector
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting out of
PARK or NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the
selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is espe-
cially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the engine off.
4. Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
NOTE:
Block the wheels with a wedge or a stone if the vehicle is
parked on a steep slope.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK (P) position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exiting
the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL (N) if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
The vehicle may not engage a newly selected gear
when shifting between PARK, REVERSE (R), or
DRIVE (D) if the vehicle is moving while shifting.
4
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK
position:
When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the
gear selector, and firmly move the selector all the way
forward until it stops and is fully seated.
Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head
winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick
shift control to select a lower gear
Ú page 99. Under
these conditions, using a lower gear will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat build-up.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the igni-
tion is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ON/RUN position. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN posi-
tion, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition
to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that
limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage.
For Recreational Towing
Ú page 141.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle
Ú page 230.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
STARTING AND OPERATING 99
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating
limits, the transmission controller may modify the
transmission shift schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or
expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement.
This is done to prevent transmission damage due to
overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light may illuminate,
and the transmission may operate differently until the
transmission cools down.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be
modified depending on engine and/or transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature
improves warm-up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch is inhibited until the engine and/or
transmission is warm. Normal operation will resume once
the temperature(s) have risen to a suitable level.
AUTOSTICK
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control of
the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This feature can
also provide you with more control during passing, city
driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer
towing, and many other situations.
Operation
When the gear selector is in the AutoStick position (beside
the DRIVE (D) position), it can be moved forward and
rearward. This allows the driver to manually select the
transmission gear being used. Moving the gear selector
forward (-) triggers a downshift and rearward (+) an
upshift. The current gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down
when the driver moves the gear selector rearward (+) or
forward (-), unless an engine lugging or overspeed
condition would result. It will remain in the selected gear
until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as
described below.
8-speed transmissions will automatically upshift when
necessary to prevent engine overspeed.
The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
The transmission will automatically downshift to
FIRST gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the
driver should manually upshift (+) the transmission as
the vehicle is accelerated.
You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or
SECOND gear. Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting
in SECOND gear. Starting out in SECOND gear can be
helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
overspeed, that shift will not occur.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of
a vehicle speed.
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
NOTE:
When Selec-Speed or Hill Descent Control is enabled,
AutoStick is not active.
To disengage AutoStick, return the gear selector to the
DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick
position at any time without taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
TRANSMISSION LIMP HOME MODE
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in a fixed gear, or may remain in NEUTRAL
(N). The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
illuminated. Limp Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without
damaging the transmission.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
4
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 STARTING AND OPERATING
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P), if possible.
If not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition until the engine turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to
normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that
you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible
convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic
equipment to assess the condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages
automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a
slightly different feeling or response during normal
operation in the upper gears. When the vehicle speed
drops or during some accelerations, the clutch
automatically disengages.
NOTE:
The torque converter clutch will not engage until the
engine and/or transmission is warm (usually after 1 to
3 miles [2 to 5 km] of driving). Because the engine speed
is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged,
it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly
when the vehicle is cold. This is normal. The torque
converter clutch will function normally once the powertrain
is sufficiently warm.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION —
IF EQUIPPED
JEEP® ACTIVE DRIVE
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Power Transfer Unit
(PTU). This system is automatic with no driver inputs or
additional driving skills required. Under normal driving
conditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction.
If the front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted
automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front
wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the
rear wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle input
(where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be sent to
the rear in a preemptive effort to improve vehicle launch
and performance characteristics.
Four-Wheel Drive (4x4)
The four-wheel drive (4WD) is fully automatic in normal
driving mode.
NOTE:
It is not possible to carry out the change of mode when the
vehicle exceeds the speed of 75 mph (120 km/h).
4WD Buttons
Enabling Four-Wheel Drive (4x4)
The buttons for the activation of four-wheel drive are
located on the center console and allow you to select the
following:
4WD LOCK
4WD LOW — (Trailhawk Models Only)
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire size
may cause failure of the Power Transfer Unit.
1 — 4WD LOW (Trailhawk Models Only)
2 — 4WD LOCK
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
STARTING AND OPERATING 101
Active Drive Control — If Equipped
The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) is locked to ensure
immediate availability of torque to the rear drive axles.
This feature is selectable in AUTO mode and automatic in
the other driving mode. 4WD LOCK can be enabled by the
following ways:
When the 4WD LOCK button is pushed.
When the Selec-Terrain switch is moved from AUTO to
any other off-road modes.
Active Drive With Low Control — (Trailhawk Models Only)
The 4WD LOW mode helps to improve the off-road
performance in all modes. To enable 4WD LOW, see the
following:
Enabling 4WD LOW
With the vehicle stationary, the ignition in the ON/RUN
position or with the engine running, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and push the 4WD LOW button once. The
instrument cluster will display the message “4WD LOW”
once the shift is complete.
NOTE:
Both LOCK and LOW LED lights will blink and then
become active on the buttons until the shift is
complete.
The instrument cluster display will illuminate the
4WD LOW icon.
Disabling 4WD LOW
To disable the 4WD LOW mode, the vehicle must be
stationary and the transmission shifted into NEUTRAL.
Push the 4WD LOW button once.
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED
Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of the vehicle
control systems, along with driver input, to provide the
best performance for all terrains.
MODE SELECTION GUIDE
Selec-Terrain Switch
AUTO: This four-wheel drive operation is a continuous
operation, is fully automatic and can be used on and
off road. This mode balances traction to ensure
maneuverability and acceleration improvement
compared to a vehicle with two wheel drive. This mode
also reduces fuel consumption, since it allows the
disconnect of the drive shaft where conditions permit.
SNOW: This mode allows you to have greater stability
under conditions of bad weather. For use on and off
road on surfaces with poor traction, such as roads
covered with snow. When in SNOW mode (depending
on certain operating conditions), the transmission may
use SECOND gear (rather than FIRST gear) during
launches, to minimize wheel slippage.
SAND/MUD: For off-road driving or use on surfaces
with poor traction, such as dry sand and roads covered
by mud or wet grass. The transmission is set to provide
maximum traction.
ROCK: (Trailhawk only): This mode is only available in
4WD LOW range. The device sets the vehicle to maxi-
mize traction and allow the highest steering capacity
for off-road surfaces. This mode gives you the
maximum performance off-road. Use for low speed
obstacles such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc.
NOTE:
ROCK mode is only available on the vehicles equipped
with the Off-Road package.
Activate the Hill Descent Control for steep downhill
control Ú page 166.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will provide increased
vehicle response and ease of maneuverability. The
electric power steering system adapts to different driving
conditions.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
4
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” or “POWER STEERING
ASSIST OFF - SERVICE SYSTEM” message and a steering
wheel icon are displayed on the instrument cluster
display, it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to
an authorized dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has
lost power steering assistance
Ú page 70.
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM HOT - PERFORMANCE
MAY BE LIMITED” message and an icon are displayed on
the instrument cluster display, it indicates that extreme
steering maneuvers may have occurred, which caused an
over temperature condition in the electric power steering
system. You will lose power steering assistance
momentarily until the over temperature condition no
longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe, pull over
and let the vehicle idle for a few moments until the light
turns off
Ú page 70.
NOTE:
Even if the power steering system is no longer opera-
tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at low speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
If the condition persists, see an authorized dealer for
service.
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function is designed to reduce fuel
consumption. The system will stop the engine
automatically during a vehicle stop if the required
conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal or pressing
the accelerator pedal will automatically restart the engine.
This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy-duty starter,
enhanced battery, and other upgraded engine parts, to
handle the additional engine starts.
AUTOSTOP MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal
customer engine start. At that time, the system will go into
STOP/START READY.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A
“STOP/START READY” message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster display within the Stop/Start
section
Ú page 70.
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
The gear selector must be in a forward gear and the
brake pedal pressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to the
zero position, and the Stop/Start telltale will illuminate
indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings will be
maintained upon return to an engine-running condition.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES
N
OT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many
safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.
Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/Start
system may be viewed in the instrument cluster display
Stop/Start Screen. In the following situations the engine
will not stop:
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
Driver’s door is not closed.
Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
Battery charge is low.
The vehicle is on a steep grade.
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an accept-
able cabin temperature has not been achieved.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower speed.
HVAC is set to MAX A/C.
Engine has not reached normal operating temperature.
The transmission is not in a forward gear.
Hood is open.
Vehicle is in 4WD LOW transfer case mode.
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pressure.
Accelerator pedal input.
Engine temperature is too high.
5 mph (8 km/h) threshold has not been achieved from
previous Autostop.
Steering angle beyond threshold.
Adaptive Cruise Control is on and speed is set.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several
times without the Stop/Start system going into a STOP/
START READY state under more extreme conditions of the
items listed above.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
STARTING AND OPERATING 103
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
A
UTOSTOP MODE
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the
brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is pressed.
The transmission will automatically re-engage upon
engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE (D).
To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is manually
adjusted.
Battery voltage drops too low.
Stop/Start OFF switch is pressed.
A Stop/Start system error occurs.
Vehicle is in 4WD LOW transfer case mode.
Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold.
Conditions That Force An Application Of The Electric Park
Brake While In Autostop Mode:
The driver’s door is open and brake pedal released.
The driver’s door is open and the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled.
The engine hood has been opened.
A Stop/Start system error occurs.
If the Electric Park Brake (EPB) is applied with the engine
off, the engine may require a manual restart and the EPB
may require a manual release (press brake pedal and
press EPB switch)
Ú page 70.
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Stop/Start OFF Switch
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will illuminate. The “STOP/
START OFF” message will appear in the instrument cluster
display and the Autostop mode will be disabled
Ú
page 70.
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to an ON
condition every time the ignition is turned off and back on.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, the
system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE STOP/
START SYSTEM” message and a yellow Stop/Start telltale
will appear in the instrument cluster display
Ú page 70.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message appears
in the instrument cluster display, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
4
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 STARTING AND OPERATING
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise Control
system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system:
Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a constant
preset speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the vehicle
speed up to the preset speed to maintain a distance
with the vehicle ahead.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with ACC, if ACC is not enabled,
Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not detect vehicles
directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the feature
selected.
Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a time.
For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control is enabled,
Adaptive Cruise Control will be unavailable, and vice
versa.
CRUISE CONTROL
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 20 mph (32 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
Cruise Control Buttons
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise Control.
“CRUISE CONTROL READY” will appear in the instrument
cluster display to indicate the Cruise Control is on. To turn
the system off, push the on/off button a second time.
“CRUISE CONTROL OFF” will appear in the instrument
cluster display to indicate the Cruise Control is off.
The system should be turned off when not in use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle has reached
the desired speed, push and release the SET (+) or SET (-)
button. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has been
set, a message “CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h)”
will appear indicating the set speed. A cruise indicator
lamp, along with set speed will also appear and stay on in
the instrument cluster when the speed is set.
1 — SET (+)/Accel
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (-)/Decel
4 — On/Off
5 — RES/Resume
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system cannot
maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast
for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an
accident. Do not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not in use is
dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always turn the system
OFF when you are not using it.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
STARTING AND OPERATING 105
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the SET
(+) button, or decrease speed by pushing
the SET
(-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
While the Cruise Control is set, press the accelerator to
pass as you would normally. When the pedal is released,
the vehicle will return to the set speed.
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and down
hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it
may be preferable to drive without Cruise Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal, or pushing the CANC button, or
normal brake pressure will deactivate the Cruise Control
system without erasing the set speed from memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the Cruise
Control without erasing the set speed from memory:
Vehicle parking brake is applied
Stability event occurs
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
Engine overspeed occurs
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in the
OFF position, will erase the set speed from memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by Cruise Control while traveling on
highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety
system and not designed to prevent collisions. The Cruise
Control function performs differently if your vehicle is not
equipped with ACC
Ú page 104.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged in light
to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need
to reset your speed. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a
forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle
directly ahead of you to maintain a set speed.
NOTE:
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or accelerate (not to exceed the
original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset
following distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications to
the vehicle will affect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning system.
Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC not enabled) will not
detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be aware
of the feature selected
Ú page 290.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control
and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control in
heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
4
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel operate
the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the current
ACC system settings. The information it displays depends
on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button until
one of the following appears in the instrument cluster
display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed, the
display will read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the instrument
cluster display.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driver involve-
ment. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions,
vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead and,
most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehi-
cles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped
vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
tions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
You should turn the ACC system off:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in
highway construction zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway off-ramp; when
driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered,
slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
WARNING!
1 — Distance Increase Button
2 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
3 — CANC/Cancel
4 — Distance Decrease Button
5 — SET (+)/Accel
6 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off (If Equipped)
7 — RES/Resume
8 — SET (-)/Decel
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
STARTING AND OPERATING 107
The ACC screen may display once again if any of the
following ACC activity occurs:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready state, the
instrument cluster display will read “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
When in 4WD Low
When the brakes are applied
When the parking brake is applied
When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE
or NEUTRAL
When the vehicle speed is below the minimum speed
range
When the brakes are overheated
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
When there is a stationary vehicle in front of your
vehicle in close proximity
When ESC Full Off Mode is active
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster display
will read “ACC Ready.” Then proceed to setting the desired
speed as described in the next section.
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the
system will turn off and the instrument cluster display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.” The system will
also turn off during any of the conditions listed in “To Turn
Off”
Ú page 108.
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET
(+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The
instrument cluster display will show the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without ACC
enabled. To change between the different modes, push
the ACC on/off button which turns the ACC and the Fixed
Speed Cruise Control off. Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise
Control on/off button will result in turning on (changing to)
Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is
below
20 mph
(32 km/h), the set speed will default to 20 mph (32 km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below 20 mph
(32 km/h).
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always leave
the system off when you are not using it.
WARNING!
In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the system will not
react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even
if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither
the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
4
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 STARTING AND OPERATING
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can cause
the vehicle to continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs, the message “DRIVER OVERRIDE”
will display in the instrument cluster display.
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set speed
while ACC is enabled, the system will not be controlling
the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead. The vehicle speed will only be determined by
the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed Speed
Cruise Control systems:
The brake pedal is applied
The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
System (ESC/TCS) activates
The vehicle parking brake is applied
The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) activates
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode
The braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated)
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC system:
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
Driver door is opened at low speeds
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in memory
if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed
The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is pushed
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
4WD Low is engaged
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES (resume)
button and remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
The instrument cluster display will show the last set
speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h)
when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is being used.
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph (0 km/h)
when ACC is active.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is at standstill longer than two seconds,
the driver will either have to push the RES (resume)
button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) to the existing set speed.
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET
(+) button, or decrease speed by pushing
the SET
(-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the button
is released. The new set speed is reflected in the instru-
ment cluster display.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic and
road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that is
too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road
conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or
decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and death
or serious personal injury.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
STARTING AND OPERATING 109
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET
(+) button or
SET
(-) button, the new set speed will be the current speed
of the vehicle.
When ACC Is Active
When you use the SET
(-) button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle suffi-
ciently to reach the set speed, the brake system will
automatically slow the vehicle.
The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop
when following the vehicle in front. If your vehicle
follows the vehicle in front to a standstill, after
two seconds the driver will either have to push the
RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to
reengage the ACC to the existing set speed.
The ACC system maintains set speed when driving
uphill and downhill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may
occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill.
This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set
speed. When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC
system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds
normal range (overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed,
ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead.
This distance setting will show in the instrument cluster
display.
Distance Settings
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance
Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance
Decrease button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane,
the instrument cluster display will show the ACC Set With
Target Detected Light. The system will then adjust vehicle
speed automatically to maintain the distance setting,
regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the
set speed.
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the
sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The system disengages
Ú page 107.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however,
the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system
applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that
its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the
set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will
flash in the instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
force.
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
4
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster display is a
warning for the driver to take action and does not neces-
sarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is
applying the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) engaged
and following a vehicle, the system will provide an
additional acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist
in passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration is
triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn signal and
will only be active when passing on the left hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop
In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle to a
standstill while following a vehicle in front, if the vehicle in
front starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle
coming to a standstill, your vehicle will resume motion
without the need for any driver action.
If the vehicle in front does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the driver
will either have to push the RES (resume) button, or apply
the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing
set speed.
NOTE:
After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a standstill for
approximately three consecutive minutes, the parking
brake will be activated, and the ACC system will be
canceled.
While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the
driver seat belt is unbuckled or the driver door is opened,
the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system
will be canceled.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR IN FRONT OF
VEHICLE” WARNING
The “ACC Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” warning
will display and a chime will sound when conditions
temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt
or ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
display the preceding message and the system will
deactivate.
This message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and snow, or tunnels with
reflective tiles). The ACC system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” warning
is active, Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC system operating properly, it is important
to note the following maintenance items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to
damage the sensor lens.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
to a collision, see an authorized dealer for service.
Do not attach or install any accessories near the
sensor, including transparent material or aftermarket
grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
malfunction.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death or serious
personal injury.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
STARTING AND OPERATING 111
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
Installing a snowplow, front-end protector, an aftermarket
grille or modifying the grille is not recommended. Doing so
may block the sensor and inhibit ACC operation.
“CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING
The “ACC Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
warning will display and a chime will sound when
conditions temporarily limit system performance. This
most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also
become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as
mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the inside of
glass. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
read “ACC Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
and the system will have degraded performance.
This message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
adverse weather conditions. The ACC system will recover
after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare
conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles
or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rearview mirror. They may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is no
longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every
trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction,
have the windshield and forward facing camera inspected
at an authorized dealer.
SERVICE ACC WARNING
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display
reads “ACC Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise
Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an internal
system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable.
If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an
ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see an authorized
dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or
unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need
to intervene. The following are examples of these types of
situations:
TOWING A TRAILER
Towing a trailer is not recommended when using ACC.
OFFSET DRIVING
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
TURNS AND BENDS
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may increase or decrease the vehicle speed for stability,
with no vehicle ahead detected. Once the vehicle is out of
the curve, the system will resume your original set speed.
This is a part of normal ACC system functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
4
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 STARTING AND OPERATING
USING ACC ON HILLS
ACC performance may be limited when driving on hills.
ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane depending on
the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
steepness of the hill.
ACC Hill Example
LANE CHANGING
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the following lane
changing example, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle
changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's
too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC may not
detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There
may not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing
vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes
if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
NARROW VEHICLES
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES
ACC does not react to stationary objects or vehicles. For
example, ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle
you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is
stopped in your lane. It will consider this stopped vehicle a
stationary object as it did not previously detect movement
from it. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes
if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
STARTING AND OPERATING 113
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The Traffic Sign Assist (TSA) system uses a camera
mounted on the windshield, as well as map data when the
vehicle is equipped with Navigation, to detect
recognizable road signs such as:
Speed limits
School zones
No passing zones
NOTE:
The TSA system will automatically display the road sign
detected in the unit of measurement (mph or km/h)
selected within Uconnect Settings or within the instru-
ment cluster display.
If no speed limit signs are detected, the system will
revert to the speed limit signs that are stored in the
Navigation system.
The system always checks the traffic signs indicating
the current speed limit signs. The system is able to
recognize and display up to two different road signs in
the instrument cluster display.
ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION
The TSA System can be enabled/disabled within the
Uconnect system through the Safety/Driver Assistance
menu. System ON is signaled by road signs shown on the
instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
Even if the system is OFF, the speed limit sign will be
displayed when the driver selects it in the HOME screen.
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST MODES
TSA has three selectable modes of operation that are
available through the Uconnect system.
Visual
When Visual is selected, the system will alert the driver
when the current speed of the vehicle exceeds the
detected speed limit by showing a graphic in the
instrument cluster display.
Visual + Chime
When Visual + Chime is selected, the system will alert the
driver when the current speed of the vehicle exceeds the
detected speed limit by showing a graphic in the
instrument cluster display, and by sounding an audible
alert. The audible alert will last for 10 seconds, and the
visual alert will remain on as long as the vehicle is
exceeding the speed limit.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the TSA system,
the radio is also muted.
TSA Off
When the TSA system is turned off, the system will not
show any traffic signs (unless selected in the HOME
screen, which will show detected speed limit signs), and
no alerts will be issued to the driver.
INDICATIONS ON THE DISPLAY
Detected traffic signs are shown in the instrument cluster
display, and can display any combination of signs at one
time (e.g. speed limit, speed limit and supplemental info,
and “Do Not Pass” signs) depending on what information
is available.
When a newly detected speed limit is higher than the
current speed limit, the display will update along with an
up arrow.
When a newly detected speed limit is lower than the
current speed limit, the display will update along with a
down arrow.
NOTE:
Up or down arrows will be displayed for up to five seconds.
Traffic Signs Recognized
1 — Current Speed Limit With Supplemental Information
(School Zone)
2 — Next Speed Limit Detected
3 — No Passing Zone Detected
4
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Supplemental Information
Supplemental information may be displayed along with a
newly detected speed limit, indicating special
circumstances of which the driver should be aware.
Available supplemental information includes:
School
Construction
Rain
Snow
Fog
NOTE:
Supplemental information will not be displayed when the
vehicle is ONLY equipped with GPS.
Speed Limit Exceeded
When the vehicle speed exceeds the displayed speed limit
by 3 mph (5 km/h), the speed limit sign on the instrument
cluster display will show a red outline to alert the driver.
HIGHWAY ASSIST SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
OPERATION
The Highway Assist system (HAS) is combined with the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system, and centers the
vehicle in the driving lane while traveling at speeds up to
90 mph (145 km/h).
For ACC system operating instructions and system
limitations, see
Ú page 105.
NOTE:
The driver should always obey traffic laws and speed
limits. Never drive above applicable speed limit restric-
tions.
The driver can override HAS at any time by braking,
accelerating, or steering the vehicle.
Just like ACC, HAS will maintain a set speed as long as the
set distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
is maintained. HAS will also keep your vehicle centered
between the lane lines, and monitor for other vehicles in
adjacent lanes by utilizing the Blind Spot Monitoring
sensors.
HAS uses sensors within the steering wheel to measure
driver attentiveness. HAS requires the driver’s hands on
the steering wheel at all times. The system will generally
aim to keep the vehicle centered in the lane, but when the
driver turns the steering wheel (e.g. to move farther away
from a large vehicle in an adjacent lane) the system will
reduce its control and enter "co-steering" mode. While in
co-steering mode, the system will provide reduced
assistance and allow the driver to control the path of the
vehicle. Once the driver stops providing input to the
steering wheel, the system will require a few seconds to
fully resume lane centering assistance, especially during
curves.
CAUTION!
Traffic Sign Assist is designed to assist the driver and
is not a substitute for the driver. It is always the
driver’s responsibility to continue to monitor the
speed limit and vehicle speed, and to operate the
vehicle in a manner safe for the road conditions.
Functionality may be limited or the system may not
work if the sensor is obstructed.
The system may have limited operation or not work at
all in weather conditions such as heavy rain, hail, and
thick fog. Strong light contrasts can influence the
recognition capability of the sensor.
The area surrounding the sensor must not be
covered with stickers or any other object.
Do not tamper or perform any operations in the area
of the windshield glass directly surrounding the
sensor.
Clean foreign matters such as bird droppings,
insects, snow or ice on the windshield. Use specific
detergents and clean cloths to avoid scratching the
windshield.
CAUTION!
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
STARTING AND OPERATING 115
TURNING HIGHWAY ASSIST ON OR OFF
Highway Assist On/Off Button
To enable the Highway Assist system, proceed as follows:
1. Push the Highway Assist on/off button located on
the right side of the steering wheel. The steering
wheel image will display white in the instrument
cluster display until the system is engaged. If ACC
was previously disabled, pushing this button will
activate BOTH ACC and Highway Assist systems.
2. If ACC was engaged before pushing the HAS on/off
button, ACC will remain active and HAS will also
become engaged (once all other conditions are met).
3. If ACC was not active before pushing the HAS on/off
button, push the SET
(+) button or the SET (-) button
and release when the desired driving speed is shown
in the instrument cluster display.
4. If desired, adjust the ACC distance setting by pushing
the Distance Increase or Distance Decrease buttons.
When all system conditions are met as described in
“System Engagement Conditions” in the next section, the
system will engage and the steering wheel image in the
display will change to green.
Highway Assist Engaged (Steering Wheel Green)
NOTE:
Along with the color change of the steering wheel image,
the “glow” effect of the instrument cluster display will also
change to green when HAS is engaged.
WARNING!
The Highway Assist system is a convenience system.
It is not a substitute for active driver involvement. It is
always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road
traffic, weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to
the vehicle ahead, position in the lane compared to
other vehicles, and brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your
complete attention is always required while driving to
maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
You should turn off the Highway Assist system:
When driving in complex driving situations (e.g.
urban environments, construction zones, etc.),
adverse weather or low visibility conditions (e.g. rain,
snow, fog, sleet, dust), or adverse road conditions
(e.g. heavy traffic, worn or missing lane markings,
etc.).
When entering a highway off-ramp, when driving on
roads that are icy, snow covered, or slippery.
When driving during difficult or uncertain conditions.
4
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 STARTING AND OPERATING
System Engagement Conditions
The following conditions must be met after enabling the
Highway Assist system before the system will engage:
Highway Assist system is enabled
Driver seat belt is buckled
System detects visible lane markings
Vehicle is traveling below 90 mph (145 km/h)
Vehicle is centered in lane
Turn signal is not activated
Vehicle is not in a tight curve
Trailer is not connected
Driver has hands on steering wheel
NOTE:
For the system to detect the driver’s hands on the steering
wheel, the wheel must be gripped on the outside. Gripping
the inside areas of the steering wheel will not satisfy the
hands-on condition to engage the system.
Do Not Grip Inside Of Steering Wheel
System Deactivation
The system will be deactivated in any of the following
situations:
If the system has detected driver inattentiveness, and
has gone through all escalation warnings
If lane markings are no longer detected
If the brake pedal is pressed or ACC system is deacti-
vated
If a turn signal is used (unless a target is in the blind
spot zone on the same side the turn signal is being
applied)
If the driver applies enough input to the steering wheel
If the driver’s seat belt is released
If the vehicle speed exceeds 90 mph (145 km/h)
If the Highway Assist system on/off button is pushed
again (HAS will turn off)
If the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system
becomes active and is providing warnings/braking
NOTE:
HAS will not enable if the system detects a trailer is
connected to the vehicle.
Pushing the Highway Assist on/off button will turn the
system off. All other deactivation conditions will place
the system back into the “enabled” state with the
steering wheel indicator displayed in white until all
engagement conditions are met again.
When the system is deactivated, the system status
indicator lights will turn off, Active Lane Management
will return to its previous state, and ACC will disable.
INDICATIONS ON THE DISPLAY
The Highway Assist system status can always be viewed in
the instrument cluster display, and status changes are
shown by changes in color of the system’s indicator lights.
As the system detects driver inattentiveness as previously
described
Ú page 114, the system status indicator lights
will change from green, to yellow, to red. The following
indicators will change in color as warnings to the driver
escalate:
Highway Assist Indicator (steering wheel icon in the
instrument cluster display)
Glow effect of the instrument cluster display
If driver attention is not returned, the system will
deactivate.
Highway Assist Indicators Are Off
HAS is not turned on/enabled by the driver.
Highway Assist Indicators Are White
HAS is turned on/enabled by the driver, but the system
is not actively steering and providing speed control for
to the vehicle.
Highway Assist Indicators Are Green
The system detects driver is attentive and is actively
steering and providing speed control for the vehicle.
Highway Assist Indicators Are Yellow
Driver inattentiveness has been detected, warning the
driver to place hands on the steering wheel.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
STARTING AND OPERATING 117
(Continued)
Highway Assist Indicators Are Red
Driver inattentiveness is still being detected, or driver
take-over is being requested, warning the driver to
place hands on the steering wheel. This warning is also
issued when the system has detected a tight curve and
is warning the driver to take control.
NOTE:
The driver
MUST replace hands on the steering wheel and
take control of the vehicle when the system is deactivated.
Highway Assist Cancelled Message
SYSTEM STATUS
Along with changes in the system’s indicator lights (green,
yellow, and red), the system can also issue several
accompanying warnings intended to provide the driver
with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate a potential
collision.
Two haptic brake jerk warnings will be issued
(red warning light is being issued).
A steering wheel vibration warning (if enabled) will
occur if the vehicle crosses a lane marker, for example,
when driving on a tight curve. The steering wheel vibra-
tion feature can be turned on or off within the Uconnect
system
Ú page 145.
SYSTEM OPERATION/LIMITATIONS
The Highway Assist system
DOES NOT:
Warn or prevent collisions with other vehicles
Steer your vehicle around stopped vehicles, slower
vehicles, construction zones or equipment, pedes-
trians, or animals
Respond to traffic lights or stop signs
Merge onto highways or exit off ramps
Change lanes or turn
React to cross traffic
NOTE:
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a core component of the
Highway Assist system. For ACC system limitations
Ú page 105.
WARNING!
Highway Assist is an SAE Level 2 Driver Assist feature,
requiring driver attention at all times. To prevent serious
injury or death:
Always remember that the Highways Assist system is
a convenience system that cannot accurately detect
all situations. Complete attention is always required
while driving, even when using the Highway Assist
system.
Always remain alert and be ready to take control of
the vehicle in the event that the Highway Assist
system deactivates, or otherwise lacks full function-
ality as described further before and after this
statement.
Always keep your hands on the steering wheel when
the Highway Assist system is activated.
Do not use a hand-held device when the Highway
Assist system is engaged.
Maintain a safe distance from other vehicles and pay
attention to traffic conditions. The Highway Assist
system will not steer to avoid safety hazards,
constructions zones, objects, or road impediments.
You need to take control to steer and brake the
vehicle in such situations, and when merging into
traffic, exiting the highway, making a turn for
crossing traffic, or stopping for traffic control devices.
Do not place any objects on the steering wheel (e.g.
steering wheel covers) which could interfere with the
hand detection sensors.
WARNING!
4
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 STARTING AND OPERATING
The Highway Assist system may have limited or reduced
functionality when one of the following conditions occur:
The vehicle’s radar sensors and/or forward facing
camera is damaged, covered, misaligned, or
obstructed (e.g. by mud, ice, snow, etc.)
If the suspension alignment is not correct, if the vehicle
is modified (e.g. lifting or lowering the suspension,
installing different sized wheels or tires)
Driving near highway toll booths
NOTE:
If damage to the windshield occurs, have the windshield
replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear, and
if equipped, the front fascia/bumper and a detected
obstacle when backing up or moving forward (e.g. during a
parking maneuver).
NOTE:
The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle's
acceleration and braking and is responsible for
controlling the vehicle's movements
Ú page 121.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense is active in DRIVE or REVERSE, as long as the
system is on. The system will remain active until the
vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
(11 km/h) or above. While in REVERSE and above the
system's operating speed, a warning will appear in the
instrument cluster display indicating the vehicle speed is
too fast. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The six ParkSense sensors (four when vehicle is not
equipped with front sensors), located in the rear fascia/
bumper, and the six ParkSense sensors located in the
front fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front and behind
the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The
front sensors detect obstacles from approximately
12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120 cm) from the front
fascia/bumper. The rear sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. These distances
depend on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle in the horizontal direction.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
“Sound and Display” is selected from the Customer -
Programmable Features section of the Uconnect system
Ú page 145.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
instrument cluster display
Ú page 70. It provides visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/
bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected
obstacle.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the system
status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the vehicle
is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in the left and/or right front or rear regions
based on the object’s distance and location relative to
the vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear region,
the display will show a single arc in the left and/or right
rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the object, the display will show
the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will
change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to
continuous.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
STARTING AND OPERATING 119
Front/Rear/Side ParkSense Arcs
1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 11 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arcs
6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 12 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arcs
4
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument cluster display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audible tone.
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches (200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs — Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Audible Alert Chime None
Single, 1/2 second,
audible chime
is heard
Audible chime increases as the objects get closer to the vehicle Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than 47 inches
(120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs — Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Audible Alert Chime None None None
Audible chime increases as
the objects get close to
the vehicle
Continuous
Radio Volume Reduced No Yes
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
STARTING AND OPERATING 121
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
(chime) after approximately three seconds when an
obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and
brake pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected
from the Uconnect system
Ú page 145.
The chime volume settings include low, medium, and high.
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the ParkSense switch, located on the switch
panel below the Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster display
Ú page 70 will
show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately
five seconds.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will
be on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will
display the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" message for five seconds.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS"
appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the
outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/
bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the
ignition. If the message continues to appear see an
authorized dealer.
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED"
message appears in the instrument cluster display, see an
authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage
the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear fascias/bumpers are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
display will read “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it
on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, etc. are
attached to the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so
can result in the system misinterpreting a close object
as a sensor problem, causing the “ParkSense Unavail-
able Service Required” message to be displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
4
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
If any objects are attached to the bumper within a 6.5 ft
(2 m) field of view, they will interfere and cause false alerts
and possibly blockage.
There may be a delay in the object detection rate if the
object is moving.
The rear sensors are automatically deactivated when
the trailer’s electric plug is inserted in the vehicle’s tow
socket. The front sensors stay active and can provide
acoustic and visual warnings. The rear sensors are
automatically reactivated when the trailer's cable plug
is removed.
SIDE DISTANCE WARNING (SDW)
S
YSTEM
The Side Distance Warning system has the function of
detecting the presence of side obstacles near the vehicle
using the parking sensors located in the front and rear
fascias/bumpers.
Side Distance Warning Display
The Side Distance Warning screen will only be displayed if
this feature is enabled within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 145.
The system warns the driver with an acoustic signal and
when selected, with visual indications on the instrument
panel display
Ú page 70.
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio if on when
the system is sounding an audible tone.
Activation/Deactivation
The system can operate only after driving a short distance
and if the vehicle speed is between 0 and 7 mph (0 and
11 km/h). The system can be activated/deactivated via
the "Settings" menu of the Uconnect system. If the
ParkSense System is deactivated via the ParkSense
switch, then the side distance warning system will
automatically be deactivated.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly be
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because
the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than
the rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the contin-
uous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
WARNING ALERTS
Distance
(in/cm)
Less than
30 inches
(76 cm)
30 – 65 inches
(76–165 cm)
Arcs-Left 11th Flashing 12th Flashing
Arcs-Right 11th Flashing 12th Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
Audible alert only when the vehicle
is on course for a collision
Radio Volume
Reduced
Yes Yes
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
STARTING AND OPERATING 123
Side Distance Warning System Status
NOTE:
The vehicle needs to be driven approximately one car
length in order for the Side Distance Warning system to
activate.
Operation With A Trailer
The system is automatically deactivated when the trailer's
electric plug is inserted in the vehicle's tow hook socket.
The rear sensors are automatically reactivated when the
trailer's cable plug is removed.
ParkSense Usage Precautions
Some conditions may influence the performance of the
Side Distance Warning system:
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear fascias/bumpers are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
Construction equipment, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of ParkSense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the message in the
instrument cluster display will read “PARKSENSE OFF.”
Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it remains
off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the igni-
tion key.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
The presence of a tow hook without a trailer may inter-
fere with the correct operation of the parking sensors.
Before using the ParkSense system, it is recom-
mended to remove the removable tow hook ball
assembly and any attachments from the vehicle when
it is not used for towing operations. If you leave the tow
hook fitted when not towing a trailer, the tow hook
could be detected as an obstacle by the sensors.
Contact your authorized dealer to update the Park-
Sense system operations.
1 — System Not Active
2 — System Active
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly be
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because
the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than
the rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the contin-
uous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
4
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is intended to
assist the driver during parallel, perpendicular, and
parallel park exit maneuvers by identifying a proper
parking space, providing audible/visual instructions, and
controlling the steering wheel. The ParkSense Active Park
Assist system is defined as “semi-automatic” since the
driver maintains control of the accelerator, gear selector
and brakes. Depending on the driver's parking maneuver
selection, the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
capable of maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a
perpendicular parking space on either side (i.e., driver
side or passenger side), as well as exiting a parallel
parking space.
NOTE:
The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and
must intervene as required.
The system is designed to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver
touches the steering wheel after being instructed to
remove their hands from the steering wheel, the
system will cancel, and the driver will be required to
manually complete the parking maneuver.
The system may not work in all conditions (e.g. environ-
mental conditions such as heavy rain, snow, etc., or if
searching for a parking space that has surfaces that
will absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).
New vehicles from the dealer must have at least
30 miles (48 km) accumulated before the ParkSense
Active Park Assist system is fully calibrated and
performs accurately. This is due to the system’s
dynamic vehicle calibration to improve the perfor-
mance of the feature.
ENABLING AND DISABLING THE
P
ARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can
be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
Active Park Assist switch, located on the switch
panel below the Uconnect display.
To enable or disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system, push the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch
once (LED turns on). Pushing the switch a second time will
disable the system (LED turns off).
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn off
automatically for any of the following conditions:
Parking maneuver is complete.
Vehicle speed is greater than 18 mph (30 km/h) when
searching for a parking space.
Vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) during
active steering guidance into the parking space.
Steering Wheel is touched during active steering guid-
ance into the parking space.
ParkSense Park Assist switch is pushed.
Driver's door is opened.
Rear liftgate is opened.
Electronic Stability Control/Anti-lock Braking System
intervention.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum number of shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE.
If the maneuver cannot be completed within the maximum
amount of shifts, the system will cancel and the
instrument cluster display will instruct the driver to
complete the maneuver manually.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
STARTING AND OPERATING 125
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only operate
and search for a parking space when the following
conditions are present:
Gear selector is in DRIVE.
Ignition is in the RUN position.
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is activated.
Driver's door is closed.
Rear liftgate is closed.
The outer surface and the underside of the front and
rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of snow, ice,
mud, dirt or other obstruction.
Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is driven above approximately 15 mph
(25 km/h), the instrument cluster display will instruct the
driver to slow down. If the vehicle is driven above approxi-
mately 18 mph (30 km/h), the system will cancel. The
driver must then reactivate the system by pushing the
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active Park
Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED will
turn off if any of the preceding conditions are not present.
PARALLEL/PERPENDICULAR PARKING
S
PACE ASSISTANCE OPERATION
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled,
the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press or to
Switch Maneuver” message will appear in the instrument
cluster display. You may select perpendicular, parallel, or
parallel park exit. The arrow buttons on the left side of the
steering wheel can be used to switch parking maneuvers.
Active ParkSense Searching
NOTE:
When searching for a parking space, use the turn
signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you
want to perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense
Active Park Assist system will automatically search for
a parking space on the passenger's side of the vehicle
if the turn signal is not activated.
The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear
of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or
protruding into the parking space (e.g., ladders,
tailgates, etc. from surrounding objects/vehicles).
When searching for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
When an available parking space has been found, and the
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular or
parallel parking sequence (depending on the type of
maneuver being performed).
Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands from
the steering wheel. When the vehicle comes to a standstill
(your hands still removed from the steering wheel), you will
be instructed to place the gear selector into the REVERSE
position.
4
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 STARTING AND OPERATING
The system may then instruct the driver to wait for steering
to complete before then instructing to check surroundings
and move backward.
Move Backward Into Parallel Parking Space
Move Backward Into Perpendicular Parking Space
The system may instruct several more gear shifts (DRIVE
and REVERSE), with hands off of the steering wheel,
before instructing the driver to check surroundings and
complete the parking maneuver.
When the vehicle is in the parking position, the maneuver
is complete and the driver will be instructed to check the
vehicle's parking position, then shift the vehicle into PARK.
The message "Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking
Position" will be displayed momentarily.
NOTE:
It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking
maneuver.
It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake and stop
the vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings
and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when
instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
When the system instructs the driver to remove their
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE.
If the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts,
the system will cancel and the instrument cluster
display will instruct the driver to complete the
maneuver manually.
The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle
speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering
guidance into the parking space. The system will
provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible
for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.
If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when performing parallel or
perpendicular parking maneuvers even when using
the ParkSense Active Park Assist system. Always
check carefully behind and in front of your vehicle,
look behind and in front of you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc-
tions, and blind spots before backing up and moving
forward. You are responsible for safety and must
continue to pay attention to your surroundings.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
Before using the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system, it is strongly recommended that the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly be disconnected from
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehi-
cles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much
closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the
vehicle sounds the continuous tone. Also, the
sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
STARTING AND OPERATING 127
EXITING THE PARKING SPACE
NOTE:
The function does not work for exiting a perpendicular
parking space, but only exiting parallel parking spaces.
Activation
To activate this function, shift to DRIVE, push the
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch, and then use the
steering wheel arrow buttons to select the Parallel Park
Exit feature. After the selection, the system activates and
instructs the driver through the instrument cluster display
about the operations that have to be carried out to
perform the maneuver correctly.
Start Of Maneuver
During the maneuver, the system asks the driver to shift to
REVERSE, and operate the turn signal in the direction you
want to exit. Let go of the steering wheel and use the brake
or accelerator pedals while the system handles the
steering automatically for exiting the parking space. If the
driver continues to carry out a voluntary or involuntary
action on the steering wheel during the exit maneuver
(touching or holding the steering wheel to prevent its
movement), the maneuver will be interrupted.
Shift To Reverse Then Move Backward
Shift To Drive Then Move Forward
End Of Maneuver
The semi-automatic maneuver ends when the display
shows the message of a completed maneuver. At the end
of the maneuver, the system gives back the vehicle control
to the driver.
Important Information
If the sensors undergo impact which alters their posi-
tion, the system operation could be greatly affected.
The sensors reach top performance after the vehicle
has gone about 30 miles (50 km) due to the dynamic
tire circumference calculations used for parking.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
Construction equipment, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of ParkSense.
Sensors may detect a nonexistent obstacle (echo
noise) due to mechanical noises, for example while
washing the vehicle or in the case of rain, strong wind,
and hail.
The sensors may not detect objects of a particular
shape or made from particular materials (very thin
poles, trailer beams, panels, nets, bushes, anti-parking
posts, pavements, rubbish bins, motor vehicles, etc.).
Always take great care to check that the vehicle and its
path are actually compatible with the parking place
identified by the system.
CAUTION!
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is only a
parking aid and it is unable to recognize every
obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not detected at all.
Obstacles located above or below the sensors will
not be detected when they are in close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It
is recommended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system.
4
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 STARTING AND OPERATING
The use of wheels and tires that are different size to the
original equipment could affect the operation of the
system.
The operation of the rear sensors is automatically
deactivated when the trailer's electric plug is inserted
in the vehicle's tow hook socket, while the front
sensors stay active and can provide acoustic and visual
warnings. If this situation occurs, Active Park Assist will
not work. The rear sensors are automatically reacti-
vated when the trailer's cable plug is removed.
In "Search in Progress" mode, the system could incor-
rectly identify a parking place to carry out the
maneuver (e.g. by a junction, driveways, roads crossing
the direction of travel, etc.).
In the case of parking maneuvers on roads with
inclines, the performance of the system could be
inferior and it may deactivate.
If a parking maneuver is being carried out between
two parked vehicles alongside a curb, the system may
cause the vehicle to drive up onto the curb.
Some maneuvers at very tight bends might be impos-
sible to be carried out.
Take great care to ensure that conditions do not
change during the parking maneuver (e.g. if there are
persons and/or animals in the parking place, moving
vehicles, etc.) and intervene immediately if necessary.
During parking maneuvers, pay attention to vehicles
approaching from the opposite direction. Always abide
by the law and road regulations.
NOTE:
Correct system operation is not guaranteed if snow
chains or the compact spare tire are fitted.
The function only informs the driver about the last
appropriate parking place (parallel or perpendicular)
detected by the parking sensors.
Some messages displayed are accompanied by
acoustic warnings.
ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT OPERATION
The Active Lane Management (ALM) system uses a
forward facing camera to detect lane markings or road
edges and to measure vehicle position within the lane
boundaries. It also uses the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)
sensors to detect vehicles in adjacent lanes while the
driver is preparing to change lanes.
The system is operational at speeds above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
When both lane markings are detected, and the vehicle
approaches (or crosses) the lane marking with no turn
signal applied, and the blind spot zone is not occupied, the
ALM system provides warnings to prompt the driver to
remain within the lane boundaries. These warnings
include a visual warning in the instrument cluster along
with steering assist torque (if configured in Uconnect
Settings).
If the driver crosses the lane marking, the system will
either guide the vehicle back to the center of the lane,
provide a vibration in the steering wheel, or both,
depending on radio settings.
When both lane markings are detected, and the driver
uses the turn signal to indicate a lane change, and a
vehicle is detected in the BSM zone on that side of the
vehicle, the ALM system provides a warning in the form of
steering assist and/or steering vibration (depending on
radio settings) to guide the vehicle back to the center of
the lane.
NOTE:
The system will suppress visual warnings, steering
vibration (if selected in radio settings), and steering
assistance (if selected in radio settings) when the
driver activates the turn signal, the blind spot zone is
clear of vehicles, and a lane change is occurring.
If the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system detects a
vehicle in the adjacent lane, and the turn signal is
applied in that direction, the BSM LED on the mirror will
flash. If the driver continues to attempt the lane
change, steering wheel torque will be provided to keep
the vehicle within its lane markings.
The driver may manually override the steering assist
warning by applying force to the steering wheel at any
time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver
drifts across the lane marking (no turn signal applied), the
Active Lane Management system provides a visual
warning in the instrument cluster, as well as a steering
assist torque (if configured in Uconnect Settings), to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
STARTING AND OPERATING 129
If the driver continues to drift out of the lane, the system
provides a flashing visual warning through the instrument
cluster display as well as a haptic steering wheel vibration
(if configured in Uconnect Settings) when the vehicle
crosses the lane boundary.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the Active
Lane Management system will monitor if the driver’s
hands are on the steering wheel and provides an audible
and visual warning to the driver if removed. The system
will cancel if the driver does not return their hands to the
wheel.
TURNING ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT
O
N OR OFF
The Active Lane Management button is located
on the switch panel below the Uconnect
display.
To turn the system on, push the Active Lane Management
button (LED turns off). A message is shown in the
instrument cluster display.
To turn the system off, push the button again
(LED turns on).
NOTE:
The Active Lane Management system will retain the
last system state on or off from the last ignition cycle when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT WARNING
M
ESSAGE
The Active Lane Management system will indicate the
current lane drift condition through the instrument cluster
display.
When the system is on, the lane lines are gray when both
of the lane boundaries have not been detected.
System On (Gray Lines)
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the system is on and only the left lane marking
has been detected, and the system is ready to provide
visual warnings in the instrument cluster display and a
vibration and/or steering assist warning in the steering
wheel if a lane departure occurs, the left lane line will
be green.
When the system senses the lane line has been
approached (but not crossed), the left lane line will
change to solid yellow and the system will provide a
haptic steering wheel vibration and/or steering assist
torque (if programmed in Uconnect Settings).
When the system senses the lane line is being crossed,
the left lane line will change to flashing yellow.
Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Line)
NOTE:
The Active Lane Management system operates with
similar behavior for a right lane departure when only the
right lane marking has been detected.
4
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 STARTING AND OPERATING
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
When the system is on, the lane lines turn from gray to
green to indicate that both of the lane markings have
been detected. When both lane markings have been
detected, the system is ready to provide visual warn-
ings in the instrument cluster display and a vibration
and/or steering assist warning in the steering wheel if
a lane departure occurs.
Lanes Sensed (Green Lines)
When the system senses a lane drift situation, the left
lane line turns solid yellow. At this time, steering assist
warning is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite
direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Drift (Solid Yellow Line)
When the system senses the lane line is being crossed,
the left lane line changes from solid yellow to flashing
yellow (on/off). At this time, vibration is applied to the
steering wheel.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Line)
NOTE:
The Active Lane Management system operates with
similar behavior for a right lane departure.
If the turn signal is activated, and the vehicle begins to
depart the lane at the same time the Blind Spot Moni-
toring (BSM) system detects another vehicle in the
BSM zones, the system will provide a haptic steering
wheel vibration and/or steering assist torque
(if programmed in Uconnect Settings).
CHANGING ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT
S
TATUS
Configurable settings for the Active Lane Management
system are available within the Uconnect system
Ú page 145.
Selectable Warning Types:
Vibration Only
Steering Assist Only
Vibration And Steering Assist
Other configurable settings for this system are for the
intensity of the vibration (hi/med/low), steering assist
warning (hi/med/low), and the warning zone sensitivity
(early/medium/late).
NOTE:
The system will not apply vibration and/or steering
assist to the steering wheel whenever a safety system
engages (Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control System,
Electronic Stability Control, Forward Collision
Warning, etc.).
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
STARTING AND OPERATING 131
The Blind Spot Monitoring system will be forced on
when the ALM system is enabled.
The ALM system will be suppressed when the Active
Driving Assist system (if equipped) is engaged.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see an
on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle
whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The
image will be displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia
radio display screen along with a caution note to “Check
Entire Surroundings” across the top of the screen. After
five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView
camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear
license plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera
delay turned off, the rear camera mode is exited and the
previous screen appears.
Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera
1. Press the Controls button located on the bottom of
the Uconnect display.
2. Press the Back Up Camera button to turn the Rear
View Camera system on.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable
modes of operation that may be selected through the
Uconnect system
Ú page 145.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera
delay turned off, the rear camera mode is exited and the
previous screen appears. When the vehicle is shifted out
of REVERSE with camera delay turned on, the camera
image will continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds
unless the following conditions occur: The vehicle speed
exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into
PARK, the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF position,
or the user presses the touchscreen X button to exit out of
the camera video display.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected back
up path based on the steering wheel position. A dashed
center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to
assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle. The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry
with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Zoom View
When the Rear View Camera image is being displayed, and
the vehicle speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h) while in any
gear, Zoom View is available. By pressing the “magnifying
glass” icon in the upper left of the display screen, the
image will zoom in to four times the standard view.
Pressing the icon a second time will return the view to the
standard Back Up Camera display.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay view
will display the standard Back Up Camera view. If the
vehicle is then returned to REVERSE gear from DRIVE, the
Zoom View selection will automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain the
selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as the vehicle
speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of
The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that
the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
4
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available until the
gear selector is placed in DRIVE or REVERSE and speeds
are at or above 8 mph (13 km/h).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE, and
speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph (13 km/h),
Zoom View is unavailable and the icon will appear gray.
While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be visible.
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Surround View
Camera system that allows you to see an on-screen image
of the surroundings and Top View of your vehicle whenever
the gear selector is put into REVERSE or a different view is
selected through the touchscreen buttons. The Top View
of the vehicle will show which doors are open. The image
will be displayed on the touchscreen display along with a
caution note “Check Entire Surroundings” across the top
of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear.
The Surround View Camera system is comprised of four
sequential cameras located in the front grille, rear liftgate
and side mirrors.
NOTE:
The Surround View Camera system has programmable
settings that may be selected through the Uconnect
system
Ú page 145.
Press this button on the touchscreen to enter
the Surround View Camera menu in the
Uconnect system.
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the Rear View
and Top View is the default view of the system.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera
delay turned on, the camera image will continue to be
displayed for up to 10 seconds unless the vehicle speed
exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK
or the ignition is placed in the OFF position. There is a
touchscreen X button to disable the display of the camera
image.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera
delay turned off, the Surround View Camera mode is
exited and the last known screen appears again.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle, including the side
view mirrors and its projected back up path based on the
steering wheel position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Modes Of Operation
Manual activation of the Surround View Camera is
selected by pressing the Surround View Camera button
located in the Controls menu within the Uconnect system.
Top View
The Top View will show in the Uconnect system with Rear
View or Front View in a split screen display. There are
integrated ParkSense arcs in the image at the front and
rear of the vehicle. The arcs will change color from
yellow to red corresponding the distance zones to the
oncoming object.
Surround View Camera View
NOTE:
Front tires will be in image when the tires are turned.
Due to wide angle cameras in the mirrors, the image
will appear distorted.
Top View will show which doors are open.
Open front doors will cancel outside image.
Open liftgate will cancel rear image while in Top View.
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of
The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
STARTING AND OPERATING 133
Rear View Plus Top View
This is the default view of the system in
REVERSE and is always paired with the
Top View of the vehicle with optional active
guidelines for the projected path when
enabled.
Rear Cross Path View
Pressing the Rear Cross Path button will give
the driver a wider angle view of the rear camera
system. The Top View will be disabled when this
is selected.
Front View Plus Top View
The Front View will show you what is
immediately in front of the vehicle and is
always paired with the Top View of the vehicle.
Front Cross Path View
Pressing the Front Cross Path button will give
the driver a wider angle view of the front
camera system. The Top View will be disabled
when this is selected.
Rear View Camera
Pressing the Back Up Camera button will
provide a full screen rear view with Zoom View.
NOTE:
If the Rear View Camera view was selected through the
Surround View Camera menu, exiting out of the Rear View
screen will return to the last known Surround View screen.
If the Back Up Camera was manually activated through the
Controls menu of the Uconnect system, exiting out of the
display screen will return to the Controls menu.
Deactivation
The system can be deactivated under the following
conditions:
The speed of the vehicle is greater than 8 mph (13 km/h).
The vehicle is shifted into PARK.
The vehicle is in any gear other than REVERSE and the
touchscreen X button is pressed.
The camera delay system is turned off manually
through the Uconnect Settings menu
Ú page 145.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lenses, clean the lenses, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lenses.
If a malfunction with the system has occurred, see an
authorized dealer.
ZOOM VIEW
When the Rear View Camera image is being displayed, and
the vehicle speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h) while in any
gear selector position, Zoom View is available.
By pressing the “magnifying glass” icon in the
upper left of the display screen, the image will
zoom in to four times the standard view.
Pressing the icon a second time will return the
view to the standard Back Up Camera display.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay view
will display the standard Back Up Camera view. If the
vehicle is then returned to REVERSE gear from DRIVE, the
Zoom View selection will automatically resume.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Surround View Camera. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for
the safety of your surroundings and must continue to
pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View should only
be used as a parking aid. The Surround View camera
is unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using Surround View to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using Surround View.
4
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain the
selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as the vehicle
speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available until the
gear selector is placed in DRIVE or REVERSE and speeds
are at or above 8 mph (13 km/h).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE, and
speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph (13 km/h),
Zoom View is unavailable and the icon will appear gray.
While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be visible.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors inside the pipe
seal the system.
1. Open the fuel filler door by pushing on the outer
edge of the fuel door.
Fuel Filler Door
Fuel Filler Pipe
2. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe; the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while
refueling.
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel, and when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
4. Keep the nozzle in the filler for five seconds after
nozzle clicks to allow fuel to drain from the nozzle.
5. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
VEHICLE LOADING
CERTIFICATION LABEL
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification
label affixed to the driver's side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), front and rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Total load must be
limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not
exceeded.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in
violation of most state and federal fire regulations
and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to
turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground
while filling.
WARNING!
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
STARTING AND OPERATING 135
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver,
all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability do not necessarily increase the
vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear
of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by
weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial
scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then
be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing
the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or
rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within
the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from
front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your
vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR
Ú page 134.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or
temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and
ready for operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully
loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the
trailer must be supported by the scale.
WARNING!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or
the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts on
your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your
vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose control.
Overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.
4
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR
Ú page 134.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by
the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load on
your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a swaying
trailer and automatically applies individual wheel brakes
and/or reduces engine power to attempt to eliminate the
trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of
hitches are commonly used to tow small and medium
sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A Weight-Distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer's directions, it provides
for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and
brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The
addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes
positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway
control and a Weight-Distributing (load equalizing) Hitch
are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
may be required depending on vehicle and trailer
configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control
of the vehicle and have a collision.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight-Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
Weight-Distributing systems may not be compatible
with surge brake couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
STARTING AND OPERATING 137
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
T
RAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing the weight
on the front/rear axles of the vehicle:
The trailer tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds
to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installed
options, must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the Tire And Loading Information
Placard located on the driver’s door pillar for the
maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for
your vehicle.
Engine/Transmission Model Maximum GTW Maximum Trailer TW
2.0L / 8-Speed Auto 4WD 2,000 lb (907 kg) 200 lb (90 kg)
When towing a trailer, the technically permissible laden weight may be exceeded by not more than 10% or 220 lb (100 kg),
whichever is lower provided that the operating speed is restricted to 62 mph (100 km/h) or less.
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds and loads.
Towing limits quoted represent the maximum towing ability of the vehicle at its Gross Combined Mass to restart on a 12 percent gradient at sea level.
The performance and economy of all models will be reduced when used for towing.
4
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components, the following guidelines are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in Scheduled Servicing
and the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 233. When
towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing
while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will
not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.
For further information
Ú page 264.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the
engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
WARNING!
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo
that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can
occur that may be difficult for the driver to control.
You could lose control of your vehicle and have a
collision.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance or damage to
brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspen-
sion, chassis structure or tires.
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains
under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the
tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always, block or
"chock" the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
WARNING!
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
STARTING AND OPERATING 139
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do
not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess
of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect the trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
(or any other device plugged into vehicle’s electrical
connectors) before launching a boat into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.
Four-Pin Connector
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front of you. Failure to do so could result in an
accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
4
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 STARTING AND OPERATING
Seven-Pin Connector
TOWING TIPS
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and backing up
the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE (D) range when towing. The transmission
controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting
when towing. For increased engine braking on steep
downhill grades, select the LOW range.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
STARTING AND OPERATING 141
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable
state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial
Highway Safety offices for additional details.
You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadver-
tent Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park
Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the Customer
Programmable Features in the Uconnect Settings.
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
F
RONT-WHEEL DRIVE (FWD) MODELS
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels
are
OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a
tow dolly (front wheels off the ground) or vehicle trailer
(all four wheels off the ground). If using a tow dolly, follow
this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the Electric Park Brake (EPB). Place the
transmission in PARK (P). Turn the engine off.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
5. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position, but do
not start the engine.
6. Press and hold the brake pedal.
7. Release the EPB.
8. Turn the ignition OFF, remove the key fob, and
release the brake pedal.
TOWING CONDITION WHEELS OFF THE GROUND FRONT-WHEEL DRIVE (FWD) FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD)
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
REAR NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
FRONT OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL BEST METHOD OK
CAUTION!
Towing with the front wheels on the ground will cause
severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on tow bar on
your vehicle. The fascia/bumper face will be
damaged.
4
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
4X4 M
ODELS
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground, or
using a towing dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. This vehicle may be
towed on flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels
are OFF the ground.
DRIVING TIPS
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
conventional passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control
or vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
When To Use 4WD LOW Range
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional
traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain,
ascending or descending steep hills, and to increase
low-speed pulling power
Ú page 100. This range should
be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow, mud,
or sand where additional low speed pulling power is
needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h)
should be avoided when in 4WD LOW range.
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water,
there are a number of precautions that must be
considered before entering the water:
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must
drive through water, try to determine the depth and the
bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to
entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water
to minimize wave effects.
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-off)
avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or the
flow rate is reduced. If you must cross flowing-water, avoid
depths in excess of 9 inches (22 cm). The flowing water
can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink into
deeper water. Determine exit point(s) that are
downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 16 inches
(40.5 cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize
wave effects. Maximum speed in 16 inches (40.5 cm) of
water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
(Trailhawk only): Avoid driving in standing water deeper
than 19 inches (48 cm), and reduce speed appropriately
to minimize wave effects. Maximum speed in 19 inches
(48 cm) of water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
fluids and lubricants (engine, transmission, Power
Transfer Unit, and Rear Drive Module) to ensure they have
not been contaminated. Contaminated fluids and
lubricants (milky, foamy in appearance) should be
flushed/changed as soon as possible to prevent
component damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
gear and shift the 4WD system to the appropriate terrain
mode, using 4WD LOW if necessary
Ú page 100. Do not
shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the ground
can cause severe transmission and/or power transfer
unit damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering as
a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving
through water may cause damage that may not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
STARTING AND OPERATING 143
Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction
will be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads because
engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE:
Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the conditions
at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
lower gear and shift the 4WD System to 4WD LOW.
Use FIRST gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills.
NOTE:
Brakes should be applied at increased slippage, but
before coming to a stop to avoid digging into the loose
surface and rendering the operator of the vehicle stuck/
immobile.
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep
hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately
apply the brakes. Once stopped, shift to REVERSE. Back
slowly down the hill allowing the compression braking of
the engine to help regulate your speed. If the brakes are
required to control vehicle speed, apply them lightly and
avoid locking or skidding the tires.
NOTE:
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill - drive
straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a
hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by
turning the front wheels slowly left and right. This may
provide a fresh “bite” into the surface and may provide
traction to complete the climb.
Traction Downhill
Shift the transmission into a low gear and the 4WD System
to 4WD LOW range or select Hill Descent Control
(if equipped)
Ú page 169. Let the vehicle go slowly down
the hill with all four wheels turning against engine
compression drag. This will permit you to control the
vehicle speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission
whenever possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is always
a good idea to check for damage.
Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean
as required.
Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly
on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and
suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to
the values specified in the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
and cleaned as soon as possible.
Impacted material can cause wheel imbalance.
Freeing the wheels of impacted material will likely
rectify imbalance condition.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make
it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt to
turn around. To do so may result in tipping and rolling
the vehicle. Always back straight down a hill in
REVERSE gear carefully. Never back down a hill in
NEUTRAL using only the brake.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the braking system may
cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking
performance. Full braking power may not be available
to prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, inspect and clean the
braking components as soon as possible.
4
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 5/5 NAV
With 10.1-inch Display, refer to your Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only
and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Depending on applicability, your vehicle may be able to
send or receive information from a wired or wireless
network. This information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and
takes appropriate steps as needed. As always, if you
experience unusual behavior, contact an authorized
dealer immediately,
Ú page 286, or refer to your
Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual for additional contact
information.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software)
is installed.
NOTE:
To help further improve user experience, features,
stability, etc., and minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should routinely check
www.driveuconnect.com (US Residents) or www.driveuco-
nnect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn about available
Uconnect software updates.
WARNING!
ONLY insert trusted devices/components into your
vehicle. Media of unknown origin could possibly
contain malicious software, and if installed in your
vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle
systems to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, contact an authorized dealer immediately.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
MULTIMEDIA 145
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located in
the center of the instrument panel. These buttons allow
you to access and change Programmable Features.
Many features can vary by vehicle and packages.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or beside
the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument
panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/ENTER control knob
below and to the right of the screen. Turn the control knob
to scroll through menus and change settings. Push the
center of the control knob one or more times to select or
change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF and
MUTE buttons on the faceplate.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn off
the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or tap the
screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu or
certain option on the Uconnect system.
Push and hold the Power button on the radio’s faceplate
for a minimum of 15 seconds to reset the radio.
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display Buttons On The
Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen
Press the Vehicle button, then press the Settings tab on
the top of the touchscreen. In this menu, the Uconnect
system allows you to access all of the available
programmable features.
NOTE:
Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings
may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired menu, press and release the preferred setting
option until a check mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting
is complete, press the Vehicle button to exit to the screen.
Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of
the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the
available settings.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
5
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 MULTIMEDIA
My Profile
When the My Profile button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s profiles.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster
Display. The available languages are English, Français, and Español.
Display Mode
This setting will adjust the display for the radio to “Auto” or “Manual”. “Manual” allows for
more customization with the radio display.
Display Brightness Headlights On
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this
setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the
brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness Headlights Off
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this
setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the
brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Theme Mode
This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting options are
“Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”. Select to show themes in Light or Dark mode. “Auto” changes
the theme with the headlights.
Units
This setting will allow you to customize the units for “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance”
(mi or km), “Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure”
(psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measurement independently.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument Cluster
Display.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
MULTIMEDIA 147
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be
“Off” for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour
format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Voice Options This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to “Male” or “Female”.
Wake Up Word
This setting will allow you to set the system “Wake Up” word. The available options are
“Off”, “Hey, Uconnect”, and “Hey, Jeep®”.
Voice Barge-in This setting will allow Voice Barge-in to be turned on or off.
Show Command List This setting will allow the Command List to be shown on or off.
Navigation Settings
This setting will redirect to the list of Navigation settings. Refer to your Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual for further information.
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or heated
steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting
will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate the
comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort
systems whenever the vehicle is started.
Radio Off Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off.
When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are
“0 min” and “20 min”.
Radio Off With Door
This setting will allow you to determine if the radio shuts off when any of the doors are
opened.
Audio Settings
This setting will open the submenu, containing the audio settings
Ú page 160.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-ups This setting will allow you to favorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
App Drawer Unfavoritings Pop-ups This setting will allow you to unfavorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
New Text Message Pop-ups
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for new text messages. Setting
options are “On” and “Off”.
Missed Calls Message
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for missed calls. Setting options
are “On” and “Off”.
Setting Name Description
5
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 MULTIMEDIA
Display
Navigation Pop-ups
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for Navigation. Setting options are
“On” and “Off”.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
More Profile Options This setting will give access to more profile options.
Setting Name Description
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the touchscreen. The available
settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster
Display. The available languages are English, Français, and Español.
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system set it
automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust the display
brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the brightness of the
display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this
setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will increase the brightness;
the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this
setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will increase the brightness;
the “-” will decrease the brightness.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
MULTIMEDIA 149
Safety/Driving Assistance
Theme Mode
This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting options are
“Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”. Select to show themes in Light or Dark mode. “Auto” changes
the theme with the headlights.
Units
This setting will allow you to change the units to “US”, “Metric”, or “Custom”.
The available options within Custom are “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km),
“Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or
bar), and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measurement independently.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
Setting Name Description
When the Safety/Driving Assistance button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These options will differ depending
on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a subfolder, select the desired folder; the available
options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking Submenu
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system on or off. The “Off”
setting will deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an
audible chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will
provide an audible chime and apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected.
5
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 MULTIMEDIA
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking
Submenu
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning alert sounds.
The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is in view, and the
possibility of a collision is detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW system signal
when the object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system signal
when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking Submenu This setting will turn the Pedestrian Emergency Braking system on or off.
Lane Management — Located In Active Lane Management
This setting will activate the system that will alert the driver when a lane departure is
detected. If selected, steering assist can be provided. The available options are
“Vibration Only”, “Steering Assist Only”, and “Vibration + Steering Assist”.
Lane Warning — Located In Active Lane Management
This setting will set the warning type for Active Lane Management. The available options
are “Early”, “Medium”, and “Late”.
Vibration Strength — Located In Active Lane Management
This setting will set the strength of the steering wheel vibration. The available options are
“Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Steering Assist Strength — Located In Active Lane Management
This setting will set the strength of the steering wheel pull when a lane departure is
detected. The available options are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
LaneSense Warning — Located In LaneSense submenu
This setting will set the warning type for LaneSense. The available options are “Early”,
“Medium”, and “Late”.
LaneSense Strength — Located In LaneSense submenu
This setting will set the strength of the LaneSense system. The available options are
“Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
ParkSense
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is detected.
The “Sound Only” setting will provide an audible chime when an object is detected.
The “Sound and Display” setting will provide both an audible chime and a visual display
when an object is detected.
Front ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available settings are
“Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings are
“Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Setting Name Description
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
MULTIMEDIA 151
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist
This setting will provide braking assistance if the Rear ParkSense system senses a
collision with an object.
Active ParkSense Mode
This setting will control Active ParkSense functionality between fully autonomous parking
and semi-autonomous parking. The available options are “Full Auto” and “Steering Only”.
Active ParkSense Proximity Chime
This setting will turn the Active ParkSense Proximity Chimes on or off. This setting in only
available when Active ParkSense Mode is set to “Full Auto”.
Blind Spot Alert
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in the
vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The “Lights” setting will
activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting
will activate both the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
Traffic Sign Assist This setting will turn Traffic Sign Assist on or off.
Traffic Sign Assist Warning
This setting will allow you to set the warning type related to the traffic sign. The available
options are “Off”, “Visual”, and “Visual + Chime”.
New Speed Zone Indication
This setting will allow you to set if the system will warn you that the speed limit has
changed in an area. The available options are “Off”, “Visual”, and “Visual + Chime”.
Drowsy Driver Alert
This setting will monitor the driver’s driving habits and warn you of any changes,
indicating that the driver may be drowsy. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Highway Assist Steering Wheel Vibration
This setting will vibrate the steering wheel when a lane departure is detected.
The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Side Distance Warning
This setting will turn the Side Distance Warning on or off and set how the system will
communicate with the user. The “Off” setting will deactivate the system. The “Sound”
setting will provide an audible chime to the user. The “Sound And Display” setting will
provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
Rear Seat Alert
When this setting is turned on and the rear doors are opened while the engine is running,
or if the engine is turned on within 10 minutes of the door opening, a message will
appear to check the rear seat when the vehicle is powered OFF.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
Setting Name Description
5
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 MULTIMEDIA
Clock & Date
When the Clock & Date button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS
This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system will control
the time via the GPS location.
Set Time Hours
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting
to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours. The “-” setting will decrease the
hours.
Set Time Minutes
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this
setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the minutes. The “-” setting will
decrease the minutes.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be
off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour
format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format. You will also be able to
adjust the clock.
Set Date This setting will allow you to set the date.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
MULTIMEDIA 153
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio device or smartphone.
The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Device Manager This setting will open the Device Manager main screen.
Do Not Disturb All
This setting will open the Do Not Disturb All settings menu. The available options are “On”
and “Off”.
Enable Two Active Phones
This setting will enable or disable two active phones within the vehicle. The setting
options are “On” and “Off”.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
5
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 MULTIMEDIA
Voice
Navigation
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Voice Options This setting will allow you to change the system’s voice to either “Male” or “Female”.
Wake Up Word
This setting will allow you to set the system’s “Wake Up” word. The available options are
“Off”, “Hey, Uconnect”, and “Hey, Jeep®”.
Voice Barge-In
This setting allows you to respond to a Voice Response before the statement is
completed by the system. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always” setting will
always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show the Command List and
provide a brief description of what the command does. The “Never” setting will turn the
Command List off.
When the Navigation button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s built-in Navigation system. These settings can change which icons
display on the map, how “time to arrival is calculated”, and route types.
For more information on Navigation and settings, refer to your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
MULTIMEDIA 155
Camera
Mirrors & Wipers
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
ParkView Backup Camera This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out of
REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines on or off.
Surround View Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the Surround View Camera when shifting out
of REVERSE.
Surround View Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Surround View Camera Guidelines on or off.
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
5
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of the vehicle purchase.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Sensitivity
This setting will allow you to set the sensitivity of the headlights depending on the amount
of visible light. The greater the sensitivity set, the less the external light variation required
to turn on the lights (e.g. with a setting on level 3 at sunset, the headlights turn on earlier
than in levels 1 and 2). The available levels are “Level 1: Minimum Sensitivity”, “Level 2:
Medium Sensitivity”, and “Level 3: Maximum Sensitivity”.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off
after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and
“90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off
after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and
“90 sec”.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
Greeting Lights This setting will turn the Greeting Lights on or off.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Cornering Lights
When this setting is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or the turn
signal indicators are on, a light (incorporated in the fog light) will turn on, on the relevant
side to improve visibility at night.
Headlight Dip
This setting will lower the headlights when driving on the opposite side of the road.
The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is
pushed on the key fob on or off.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
MULTIMEDIA 157
Brakes
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
Brake Service This setting will allow you to retract the brakes for servicing.
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Unlock On Exit This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed
on the key fob on or off.
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. The “Off”
setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed. The “1st Press” setting
will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting will
sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the key fob.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are needed
to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock the driver door on the
first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting will unlock all doors on the first
push of the Unlock button.
5
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 MULTIMEDIA
Seats & Comfort
Passive Entry
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n Go™) on or off.
Power Liftgate Alert
This setting will chime an audible alert when the power liftgate is raising or lowering.
Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Hands-Free Power Liftgate
This setting will use hands-free technology to automatically open or close the power
liftgate. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Auto Door Locks
This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when the vehicle
reaches 15 mph (24 km/h).
Setting Name Description
When the Seats & Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote start has been activated or
the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or heated
steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting
will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate the
comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort
systems whenever the vehicle is started.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
MULTIMEDIA 159
Key Off Options
When the Key Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings will only activate when the ignition is
set to OFF.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Radio Off Delay
This setting will keep the radio running after the engine is turned off. When any door is
opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are “0 min” and “20 min”.
Radio Off With Door
This setting will shut the radio off when the door is opened. The available settings are
“On” and “Off”.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
vehicle has been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount of time. The “-” will
decrease the amount of time.
5
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 MULTIMEDIA
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio location within the
vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and left/right
of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the volume
will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings are “Off”, “1”, “2”,
and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the AUX port.
The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Auto-On Radio
This setting will automatically turn the radio on when the vehicle is started. The available
settings are “Off”, “On”, and “Recall Last”. With Recall Last, the system resumes the
previous task before vehicle shut off.
Radio off With Door
This setting will keep the radio on when a door is opened or until the Radio Off Delay time
is reached. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Loudness
This setting improves the sound quality at lower volumes. The available options are “On”
and “Off”.
Volume Adjustment
This setting will allow you to set the audio volume levels for each option (Media, Phone,
Navigation, etc.). You can set the volume between 0 and 38.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
MULTIMEDIA 161
Notifications
SiriusXM® Setup
When the Notifications button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Notifications for the system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Notification Sounds
This setting will turn off the Notification chime that plays when a new notification is sent.
The options are “On” and “Off”.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the App Favorited Pop-Up on or off.
App Drawer Unfavoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the App Unfavorited Pop-Up on or off.
New Text Message Pop-Ups
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for new text messages of any connected
phone on or off.
Missed Calls Message
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for missed calls of any connected phone on
or off.
Navigation Pop-Ups This setting turns receiving/storing predictive Navigation Pop-Ups on or off.
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be used to skip specific
radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
SiriusXM® Account, Profile, And Settings This setting will redirect you to the SiriusXM® settings menu within the SiriusXM® menu.
Block Explicit
This setting will skip over content labeled as explicit. The available settings are “On”
and “Off”.
5
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 MULTIMEDIA
Software Updates
System Information
When the Software Updates button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the setting related to updating the Uconnect software.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Software Downloads over Wi-Fi
This setting will allow software updates to happen over Wi-Fi. Selectable options for the
setting are “On” and “Off”.
When the System Information button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Software Licenses This will display the software licensing information screen.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
MULTIMEDIA 163
Reset
When the Reset button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings. These settings can clear
personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Restart Radio This setting will reboot the radio.
Reset Apps Drawer To Default Order
This setting will return the apps drawer to the default order. The available options are
“Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can also be pressed to cancel the screen.
Restore Apps
This setting will delete all of the installed apps if there is an issue with using or
installing an app. The available options are “Back” and “Next”.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data from
the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
NOTE:
Performing this function may take several minutes to complete.
Reset Wi-Fi Password For Projection
This setting will allow you to reset the vehicle’s Wi-Fi password for smartphone projection.
The available options are “Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can also be pressed to cancel
the screen.
Factory Reset This setting will restore the radio to its factory default settings.
5
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 MULTIMEDIA
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o’clock
positions.
Remote Sound System Controls
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push
button in the center and controls the volume and mode of
the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch will
increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker
switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the right-hand control’s center button will make
the radio switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push
button in the center. The function of the left-hand control
is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode:
RADIO OPERATION
Pushing the top of the switch will seek up for the next
available station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
seek down for the next available station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have
programmed in the radio preset button.
MEDIA MODE
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next track
on the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth®). Pushing
the bottom of the switch once goes to the beginning of the
current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it
is within eight seconds after the current track begins to
play.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by repositioning the mobile phone within the vehicle.
This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio
performance does not satisfactorily improve from
repositioning the mobile phone, it is recommended that
the volume be turned down or off during mobile phone
operation when not using the Uconnect system.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits.
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 8 inches (20 cm) or further from
the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and
recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the
scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy
emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones.
However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in
some situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the
wireless radio
Ú page 290.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
165
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and braking
performance under various driving conditions. The system
automatically prevents wheel lock and enhances vehicle
control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the system
detects one or more wheels are beginning to lock. Road
conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad
tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the
likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when the ABS activates:
ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (which you may
continue to hear for a short time after the stop)
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop
The ABS is designed to function optimally with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification may
result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long
as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while
driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and that service is required.
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system should be
serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of
Anti-lock Brakes. If the ABS Warning Light does not come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have
the light repaired as soon as possible.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly installed or high output radio transmit-
ting equipment. This interference can cause possible
loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
WARNING!
6
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 SAFETY
REAR SEAT REMINDER ALERT (RSRA)
RSRA alerts you of the possible presence of an object,
passenger, or pet in the rear seats through a visual and
auditory notification. The system will activate
automatically if a rear door was opened within 10 minutes
of the ignition being placed in the ON/RUN position. RSRA
does not directly detect objects, passengers, or pets in the
rear seats. When the previous conditions are met, RSRA
displays the message “Check Rear Seat” on the
instrument cluster display and sounds an auditory alert
upon the driver placing the ignition in the OFF position to
exit the vehicle.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control (EBC) system. This system includes the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS),
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Electronic Roll
Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Hill
Start Assist (HSA), and Traction Control System (TCS).
These systems work together to enhance both vehicle
stability and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Dynamic Steering
Torque (DST), Hill Descent Control (HDC), Rain Brake
Support (RBS), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), and/or Trailer
Sway Control (TSC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing
the rate and amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit
of the system, you must apply continuous braking
pressure during the stopping sequence (do not “pump”
the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is
released, the BAS is deactivated.
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or comes on
while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not
functioning properly and that immediate service is
required. If the Brake System Warning Light does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
DST is a feature of the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
and Electric Power Steering (EPS) modules that provides
torque at the steering wheel for certain driving conditions
in which the ESC module is detecting vehicle instability.
The torque that the steering wheel receives is only meant
to help the driver realize optimal steering behavior in order
to reach/maintain vehicle stability.
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete
stop, then shift the automatic transmission into
PARK and apply the parking brake.
Always make sure the keyless ignition node is in the
OFF position, key fob is removed from the vehicle
and vehicle is locked.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The
capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of
others.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
SAFETY 167
The only notification the driver receives that the feature is
active is the torque applied to the steering wheel.
NOTE:
The DST feature is only meant to help the driver realize the
correct course of action through small torques on the
steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of the
DST feature is highly dependent on the driver’s sensitivity
and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is very
important to realize that this feature will not steer the
vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for steering
the vehicle.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
EBD manages the distribution of the braking torque
between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip
of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to
prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the front
axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for dangerous wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed
of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially dangerous cause wheel lift, it
then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that dangerous wheel
lift will occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of
dangerous wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive
driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to
other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability of the
vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for
oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying
the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the
these conditions. Engine power may also be reduced to
help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer
or understeer condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light located in
the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the
ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions
and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel
lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel
lift or rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the
roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also
cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle
control due to inappropriate driver input for the condi-
tions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless
or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain
your vehicle, may change the handling characteris-
tics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the
performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn
tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
modification or poor vehicle maintenance that
reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
6
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 SAFETY
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC
system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific
reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for
activation, which allows for more wheel spin than normally
allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the ESC
OFF button, located below the radio. The ESC OFF
Indicator Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again,
momentarily push the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF
Indicator Light will turn off.
NOTE:
When driving with snow chains, or when starting off in
deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to allow
more wheel spin. This can be accomplished by momen-
tarily pushing the ESC OFF button to enter “Partial Off”
mode. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off” mode is
overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily pushing the
ESC OFF button. This may be done while the vehicle is in
motion.
Full Off (Four-Wheel Drive Models Only)
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use when
ESC stability features could inhibit vehicle maneuverability
due to trail conditions. This mode is entered by pushing
and holding the ESC OFF button for five seconds when the
vehicle is stopped and the engine is running. After five
seconds, the ESC OFF Indicator Light will illuminate and
the “ESC OFF” message will appear in the instrument
cluster display.
In this mode, ESC and TCS, except for the Brake Limited
Differential (BLD) feature described in the TCS section, are
turned off until the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph
(64 km/h). At 40 mph (64 km/h), the system returns to
“Partial Off” mode. TCS remains off. When the vehicle
speed drops below 30 mph (48 km/h), the ESC system
shuts off. ESC is deactivated at low vehicle speeds so that
it will not interfere with off-road driving. However, ESC
function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds
above 40 mph (64 km/h). The ESC OFF Indicator Light will
always be illuminated when ESC is off.
To turn ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF
button. This will restore the “ESC On” mode of operation.
NOTE:
The “ESC OFF” message will display and an audible chime
will sound when the gear selector is placed into the PARK
position from any other position, and then moved out of
the PARK position. This will occur even if the message was
previously cleared.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
in the instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON mode. It should go
out with the engine running. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes on
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (km) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section, has been disabled and the ESC OFF
Indicator Light will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of
TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
In the "Full Off" mode, the engine torque reduction and
stability features are disabled. In an emergency evasive
maneuver, the ESC system will not engage to assist in
maintaining stability. “Full Off” mode is intended for
off-highway or off-road use only.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
SAFETY 169
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light starts to
flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system
becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light also flashes when Traction Control System (TCS) is
active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and the
ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN posi-
tion, the ESC system will be on even if it was turned off
previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) —
If Equipped
The ESS activates the hazard lights at a faster than normal
speed when heavy brake pressure is applied. ESS will only
activate when the speed is above 31 mph (50 km/h). The
ESS operates independently of other lamps, and will turn
on and off automatically. This indicates to others that the
vehicle is stopping quickly.
NOTE:
A warning light will illuminate within the instrument
cluster to inform the driver that the ESS feature has
been activated.
When towing a trailer, ESS will also activate the rear
indicator lights of the trailer.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
Hill Descent Control (HDC) is intended for low speed
off-road driving while in 4WD Low. HDC maintains vehicle
speed while descending hills during various driving
situations. HDC controls vehicle speed by actively
controlling the brakes.
HDC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
with brake or throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
vehicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, located in
front of the gear selector. The following conditions must
also be met to enable HDC:
The driveline is in 4WD Low.
The vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).
The Electric Park Brake (EPB) is released.
The driver’s door is closed.
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled, it will activate automatically if driven
down a grade of sufficient magnitude (greater than
approximately 8%). The set speed for HDC is selectable by
the driver and can be adjusted within the thresholds by
using throttle or brake application.
Driver Override:
The driver may override HDC activation speed with throttle
or brake application at any time.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
following conditions occur:
Driver overrides HDC set speed with a speed exceeding
20 mph (32 km/h) but remains below 25 mph (40 km/h).
Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magnitude
(less than approximately 8%), is on level ground, or is
on an uphill grade.
Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the
following conditions occur:
The driver pushes the HDC switch.
The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low.
The driver’s door opens.
The vehicle is driven greater than 25 mph (40 km/h)
(HDC exits immediately.)
6
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 SAFETY
Feedback To The Driver:
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC
switch has an LED, which offers feedback to the driver
about the state HDC is in.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
remain solid when HDC is enabled or activated.
This is the normal operating condition for HDC.
The switch lamp will flash for several seconds then
extinguish when the driver pushes the HDC switch
when enable conditions have not been met.
The HDC switch is located within the Selec-Terrain knob in
the upper right position.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete stop
while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake while
stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold the brake
pressure for a short period. If the driver does not apply the
throttle before this time expires, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as
normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The parking brake must be off.
The driver’s door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.
The system will not activate if the transmission is in
PARK or NEUTRAL.
DISABLING AND ENABLING HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster display,
see Ú page 70 for further information.
If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, see
Ú page 145 for further information.
TOWING WITH HSA
Hill Start Assist (HSA) will also provide assistance to
mitigate roll back while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must
remain attentive to the driving conditions and is
responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur, such
as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while
pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and
objects, and most importantly brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision
or serious personal injury.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated
with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the
trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In
order to avoid rolling down an incline while resuming
acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or
apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing
the brake pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also, be certain
to place the transmission in PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a colli-
sion or serious personal injury.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
SAFETY 171
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet conditions.
It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure
to remove any water buildup on the front brake rotors.
It functions when the windshield wipers are in LO or
HI speed. When Rain Brake Support is active, there is
no notification to the driver and no driver interaction is
required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full braking
during emergency braking situations. It anticipates when
an emergency braking situation may occur by monitoring
how fast the throttle is released by the driver. The
Electronic Brake Controller (EBC) system will prepare the
brake system for a panic stop.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin for each of the
driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may apply
brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce
vehicle power to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD) functions similarly to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will
allow more vehicle torque to be applied to the wheel that
is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS and
ESC are in reduced modes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become
active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is
recognized.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use
caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue
weight recommendations
Ú page 135.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light will flash, the engine power may be reduced
and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual
wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” or
“Full Off” modes.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The BSM system uses two radar sensors, located inside
the rear fascia/bumper, to detect highway licensable
vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that
enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the
vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rearview mirrors to
let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear and enters standby mode when the vehicle is
in PARK.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer
load to eliminate trailer sway.
6
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 SAFETY
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width, 12 ft (3.8 m), on both sides of the vehicle.
The zone length starts at the outside mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear fascia/bumper
of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection
zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed
reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will
alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
detection zones.
The BSM system will automatically disable when a
trailer is detected. If the attached trailer is not
detected, the system detection zone DOES NOT
change. Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane is
clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a
lane change. If the trailer or other object (i.e., bicycle,
sports equipment) extends beyond the side of your
vehicle, this may result in the BSM Warning Light
remaining illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a
forward gear. It may be necessary to deactivate the
BSM system manually to avoid misdetection
Ú page 145.
The BSM system can become blocked if snow, ice, mud, or
other road contaminations accumulate on the rear fascia/
bumper where the radar sensors are located. The system
may also detect blockage if the vehicle is operated in
areas with extremely low radar returns such as a desert or
parallel to a large elevation drop. If blockage is detected,
a “Blind Spot Temporarily Unavailable, Sensor Blocked”
message will display in the cluster, both mirror lights will
illuminate, and BSM and RCP alerts will not occur. This is
normal operation. The system will automatically recover
and resume function when the condition clears or when
an ignition cycle occurs. To minimize system blockage, do
not block the area of the rear fascia/bumper where the
radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper
stickers, bicycle racks, etc.) and keep it clear of road
contaminations.
Radar Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown)
The BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object
when enabled. If the turn signal is then activated, and it
corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle,
an audible chime will also be sounded when chimes are
enabled. In addition to the audible alert the radio (if on)
will also be muted during the chime event
Ú page 174.
Warning Light Location
As part of the Active Lane Management system, if the
vehicle begins to drift into an adjacent lane that has an
active LED indication, the LED will flash if steering torque
is provided to guide the vehicle back to the center of the
lane
Ú page 128.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see
if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
SAFETY 173
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed
less than 10 mph (16 km/h), the warning light will be
illuminated. If the difference in speed between the
two vehicles is greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), the
warning light may not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on
such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle
does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes
Ú page 290.
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help
detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system
is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or
animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance
over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
6
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 SAFETY
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out of
parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the
parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed.
The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross
traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the
driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE (R), the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms,
including reducing the radio volume anytime the system is
enabled regardless of the chime setting.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors
are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will
not be able to alert the driver.
Blind Spot Modes
Blind Spot Alert has three selectable modes of operation
that are available in the Uconnect system.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only (Default Setting)
When operating in Lights Only mode, the BSM system will
provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror
based on a detected object. However, when the system is
operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the system will
respond with both visual and audible alerts when a
detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio is muted for the duration of the
chime.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object.
If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to
an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and
detected object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued.
In addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also
be muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
volume is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off, there will be no visual
or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating mode
when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a backup aid
system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect
an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers
must be careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
SAFETY 175
Blocked Sensor
If the system detects degraded performance due to
contamination or foreign objects, a message will warn you
of a blocked sensor and the warning indicators in side
view mirrors will be illuminated. The warning indicators will
remain illuminated until blockage clearing conditions are
met. First clear the fascia/bumper area around the
sensors of the blockage. After removing the blockage,
reset the system by cycling the ignition from ON to OFF and
then back ON.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
W
ITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with audible
warnings, visual warnings (within the instrument cluster
display), and may apply a brake jerk to warn the driver
when it detects a potential frontal collision. The warnings
and limited braking are intended to provide the driver with
enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the potential
collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC), to
calculate the probability of a forward collision. When the
system determines that a forward collision is probable, the
driver will be provided with audible and visual warnings
and may provide a brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide a
limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver reacts
to the warnings by braking and the system determines
that the driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but
has not applied sufficient brake force, the system will
compensate and provide additional brake force as
required.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event begins
at a speed below 39 mph (62 km/h), the system may
provide the maximum braking possible to mitigate the
potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision
Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle
completely, the system will hold the vehicle at standstill for
two seconds and then release the brakes.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in
front of you is no longer probable, the warning message
will be deactivated
Ú page 290.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph
(2 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guardrails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW will
be deactivated until the next key cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the
vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be
deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every
type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
6
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 SAFETY
FCW Settings
The Forward Collision menu setting is located in the
Uconnect Settings
Ú page 145.
NOTE:
The default status of FCW is “Full On,” this allows the
system to provide warning and autonomous braking in the
event of a potential frontal collision.
Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning” prevents the
system from providing autonomous braking, or additional
brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in the
event of a potential frontal collision.
Changing the FCW status to “Off” deactivates the system,
so no warning or autonomous braking will be available in
case of a possible collision.
NOTE:
The FCW system state is kept in memory from one ignition
cycle to the next. If the system is turned off, it will remain
off when the vehicle is restarted.
Changing FCW Sensitivity And Operating
Status
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 145.
The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium” setting and
the system status is “Warning & Braking”. This allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings and it
applies autonomous braking.
By changing the FCW status setting to "Far", the system
provides possible collision warnings on objects farther
away. This results in earlier warnings and provides the
most reaction time to avoid possible collisions.
NOTE:
The “Far” setting may result in a greater number of
FCW possible collision warnings experienced.
By changing the FCW status setting to "Near", the system
provides possible collision warnings on objects closer to
the vehicle. This results in later warnings and provides
less reaction time than the "Far" and "Medium" settings,
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
NOTE:
The “Near” setting may result in a lesser number of
FCW possible collision warnings experienced.
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning” prevents
the system from providing limited active braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision,
but maintains the audible and visual warnings.
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system
from providing autonomous braking, or additional
brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in
the event of a potential frontal collision.
The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as over-
head objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
higher rates of speed.
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster display reads “FCW Limited
Functionality” or “FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition that
limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
driveable under normal conditions, the active braking may
not be fully available. Once the condition that limited the
system performance is no longer present, the system will
return to its full performance state. If the problem persists,
see an authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display
reads “FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there is an
internal system fault. Although the vehicle is still driveable
under normal conditions, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
SAFETY 177
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) —
If Equipped
PEB is a subsystem of the Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) system which provides the driver with audible
warnings and visual warnings, in the instrument cluster
display. It may apply limited automatic braking when it
detects a potential frontal collision with a pedestrian/
cyclist.
PEB Message
If a PEB event begins at a speed below 39 mph (62 km/h),
the system may provide maximum braking to mitigate the
potential collision with a pedestrian. If the PEB event stops
the vehicle completely, the system will hold the vehicle at
a standstill for two seconds and then release the brakes.
When the system determines a collision with the
pedestrian in front of you is no longer probable, the
warning message will be deactivated.
The minimum speed for PEB activation is 3 mph (5 km/h).
Turning PEB On Or Off
NOTE:
The default status of PEB is “On.” This allows the system
to warn you of a possible frontal collision with the pedes-
trian.
The PEB button is located in the Uconnect display in the
Controls settings
Ú page 145.
To turn the PEB system off, push the Pedestrian
Emergency Braking OFF button.
To turn the PEB system back on, push the Warning Active
Braking button.
Changing the PEB status to “Off” deactivates the system,
so no warning or active braking will be available in case of
a possible frontal collision with the pedestrian/cyclist.
NOTE:
The PEB system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down. The system will not reset to
the default setting when the vehicle is restarted.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based
on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature decreases, the
tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be
set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as
the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for
at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded
into the tire sidewall. The tire pressure will also increase
as the vehicle is driven. This is normal and there should be
no adjustment for this increased pressure.
For more information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires, see
Ú page 264.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire. The TPMS will continue to
warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the
condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure
is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure.
NOTE:
Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Moni-
toring System Warning Light) illuminates, you must
increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold
placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Warning Light to turn off.
WARNING!
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can PEB detect every
type of potential collision with a pedestrian. The driver
has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling
the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
6
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 SAFETY
The system will automatically update and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will turn off
once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of
33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi
(193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will
decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi
(165 kPa). This tire pressure is low enough to turn on
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light.
Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to
approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will still be on. In this
situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value
Ú page 290.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be
increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light off.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinfla-
tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pres-
sure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pres-
sure in the tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
Receiver module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which will display in the instrument cluster display
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
The TPMS sensor is not designed for use on after-
market wheels and may contribute to a poor overall
system performance or sensor damage. Customers
are encouraged to use Original Equipment Manufac-
turer (OEM) wheels to ensure proper TPMS feature
operation.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function
checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the TPMS sensor.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
SAFETY 179
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low
Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster
and a chime will sound when tire pressure is
low in one or more of the four active road tires.
In addition, the instrument cluster will display a "Tire Low"
message, an “Inflate to XX” message, and a graphic
showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire
pressure values highlighted or in a different color.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low Pressure Warning
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and
inflate the tires with low pressure (those highlighted or in a
different color in the instrument cluster display graphic) to
the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value, as
shown in the “Inflate to XX” message. Once the system
receives the updated tire pressures, the system will
automatically update, the pressure values in the graphic
display in the instrument cluster will stop being highlighted
or return to their original color, and the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will turn off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be
increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
also sound a chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will
display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum
of five seconds and then display dashes (--) in place of the
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will no longer flash, and the “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message will no longer display, and a pressure
value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can
occur due to any of the following:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors
Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
affects radio wave signals
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel hous-
ings
Using tire chains on the vehicle
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors
Vehicles With Compact Spare Or Non-Matching Full Size
Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size
does not have a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the
pressure in the compact or non-matching full size
spare tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure
below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next
ignition key cycle, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Warning Light will remain on and a chime will
sound. In addition, the graphic in the instrument
cluster will still display a different color or highlighted
pressure value and the “Inflate to XX” message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then display
dashes (--) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid, and the instrument cluster will
display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for five
seconds and then display dashes (--) in place of the
pressure value.
6
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 SAFETY
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact
spare or non-matching full size, the TPMS will update
automatically. In addition, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will turn off and the
graphic in the instrument cluster will display a new
pressure value instead of dashes (--), as long as no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit
in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire
assemblies that do not have TPMS sensors, such as when
installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on your
vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensors. Then,
drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h).
The TPMS will chime, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on. The instrument cluster will display the
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then display
dashes (--) in place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no
longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will
remain in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPMS
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then turn off. The instrument
cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message
and then display pressure values in place of the dashes.
On the next ignition cycle the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"
message will no longer be displayed as long as no system
fault exists.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may
be standard equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an
authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly must be secured in the appropriate child
restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in a rear
seating position
Ú page 200.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint
Ú page 200.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front air
bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between
occupants and the door and occupants could be
injured.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
SAFETY 181
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, see
Ú page 286 for customer service contact
information.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from
the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection
and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all
times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is
in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a
few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START
or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are
buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when an outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is
unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence
starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and
sounding an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert
warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on
vehicle speed until the driver and occupied outboard front
seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should
instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized
dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating
BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
6
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/
shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you
under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat
belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of
the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some colli-
sions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or
not an air bag is also provided at their seating posi-
tion to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in
the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury
in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at the
strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
WARNING!
A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal inju-
ries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you prop-
erly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you
from injury during a collision. You are more likely to
hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
WARNING!
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
SAFETY 183
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for
vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grab the latch
plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat
belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click”.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if
you have questions regarding seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Program facility for inspection.
WARNING!
6
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the
latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt webbing
180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately
above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the top
of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward
to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that serves you
best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped
with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder
belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position
without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify
the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on
the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjustments when
the vehicle is stationary.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
SAFETY 185
Second Row Center Seat Belt Operating
Instructions
The second row center seat belt may feature a seat belt
with a mini-latch plate and buckle. The mini-latch plate
and buckle (if equipped) should remain connected at all
times. If the mini-latch plate and buckle become
disconnected, they must be properly reconnected prior to
the rear center seat belt being used by an occupant.
1. Grab the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over
the seat.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
2. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear
a “click.”
Inserting Mini-Latch Plate Into Mini-Buckle
3. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to
go around your lap.
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
5. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the
lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the seat belt in a collision.
6. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.
7. To release the seat belt, push the red button on
the buckle.
6
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 SAFETY
8. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the
mini-buckle, insert the regular latch plate into the
center red slot on the mini-buckle.
Detaching Mini-Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, an authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only
if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat
Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it
must be removed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if
they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder
belt across the chest and away from the neck. Never place
the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
WARNING!
If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not
properly connected when the seat belt is used by an
occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide
proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury in
a collision.
When reattaching the mini-latch plate and
mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the
preceding procedure to detach the mini-latch plate
and mini-buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach
the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when
worn, the distance between the front edge of the
Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the
occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a colli-
sion. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap
belt is not long enough and only use in the recom-
mended seating positions. Remove and store the
Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
SAFETY 187
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack
from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices
may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt
placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed
air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an
Energy Management feature that may help further reduce
the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt
system has a retractor assembly that is designed to
release webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system
Ú page 207.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each
seating position.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the
buckle until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly
restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
6
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 SAFETY
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may
be standard equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an
authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
associated with the electrical Air Bag System
Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the
following Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic parts
of the air bag system whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
If the ignition switch is in the OFF position, the air bag
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power
or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the ON/
RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning
Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any
part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light,
either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial
startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related
gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags
may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
SAFETY 189
(Continued)
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument
panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on
until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately
Ú page 81.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering
wheel. The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the
air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to
reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
6
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 SAFETY
This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger
Occupant Classification System (OCS) that is designed to
provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output
appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as
determined by the OCS.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags
are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side,
or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce
substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole
collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detects a
collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the inflator
units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to
inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold
out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The
front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink
your eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of a
Federally regulated safety system for this vehicle. It is
designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
output appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight, as
determined by the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of
the following:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
located in the front passenger seat
Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is
located beneath the passenger seat cushion foam.
Any weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The
OCM uses input from the Sensor to determine the front
passenger’s most probable classification. The OCM
communicates this information to the ORC. The ORC may
reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag deployment based on occupant classification. In
order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important
for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly
wearing the seat belt.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some colli-
sions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your
seat belts even though you have air bags.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
SAFETY 191
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the inflation
rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS
estimates that:
The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
light objects on it; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a small
passenger, including a child; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing
child restraint; or
The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front
passenger seat and never install a child restraint system,
including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front
passenger seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. The OCS estimates the seated weight on the
front passenger seat and where that weight is located. The
OCS communicates the classification status to the ORC.
The ORC uses the classification to determine whether the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation rate should be
adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important
for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly
wearing the seat belt. Properly seated passengers are:
Sitting upright
Facing forward
Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfort-
ably on or near the floor
Sitting with their back against the seatback and the
seatback in an upright position
Seated Properly
Front Passenger Seat
Occupant Status
Front Passenger
Air Bag Output
Rear-facing child restraint
Reduced-power
deployment
Child, including a child in a
forward-facing child
restraint or booster seat*
Reduced-power
deployment OR Full-power
deployment
Properly seated adult
Full-power deployment OR
reduced-power
deployment
Unoccupied seat
Reduced-power
deployment
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a
rear seat.
Front Passenger Seat
Occupant Status
Front Passenger
Air Bag Output
6
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 SAFETY
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult,
occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may reduce
the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s seated
weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so
may result in serious injury or death. The OCS determines
the most probable classification of the occupant that it
detects. The OCS will detect the front passenger’s
decreased or increased seated weight, which may result in
an adjusted inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not mean that the
OCS is working improperly. Decreasing the front
passenger’s seated weight on the front passenger seat
may result in a reduced-power deployment of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Increasing the front
passenger’s seated weight on the front passenger seat
may result in a full-power deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instrument
panel).
The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns
to face the rear of the vehicle.
The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright
position.
The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat
and center console.
Accessories that may change the seated weight on the
front passenger seat are attached to the front
passenger seat.
Anything that may decrease or increase the front
passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
SAFETY 193
(Continued)
Not Seated Properly
The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel will
turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the front
passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS may
affect the operation of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come on, or stays
on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as you drive,
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for service
immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS
components that may affect the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly
classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the
OCS components must function as designed. Do not make
any modifications to the front passenger seat
components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the seat,
trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason, take
the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only FCA US LLC
approved seat accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the specific
model being repaired. Always use the correct seat
cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) component or SRS related component or
fastener be modified or replaced with any part except
those which are approved by FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
If a child restraint system, child, small teenager or
adult in the front passenger seat is seated improp-
erly, the occupant may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different from the occupant’s properly
seated weight input. This may result in serious injury
or death in a collision.
Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with the
seatback in an upright position, your back against
the seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in the
center of the seat, with your feet comfortably on or
near the floor.
Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat.
Holding an object may provide an output signal to the
OCS that is different than the occupant’s properly
seated weight input, which may result in serious
injury or death in a collision.
Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or death
in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor
under the front passenger seat.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger seat assembly, its related compo-
nents, seat cover or cushion may inadvertently
change the air bag deployment in case of a frontal
collision. This could result in death or serious injury
to the front passenger if the vehicle is involved in a
collision. A modified vehicle may not comply with
required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (CMVSS).
If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
6
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 SAFETY
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front
occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee
Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs
are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or
on the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are
at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering the
SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
SAFETY 195
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows.
An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if
they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate.
Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a
deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain side impact events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side
impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags
in a particular impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid
the ORC in determining the appropriate response to
impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side
Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts
that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side
impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left
side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a
right-side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether
or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled
or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other
cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows
where the SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or
killed. Occupants, including children, should never
lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if they are
in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection from
the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat
belts properly and sit upright with their backs against
the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a
child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
the size of the child.
6
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 SAFETY
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but
they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are designed to
activate in certain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether deployment in a
particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is
not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and
seat belt pretensioners should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will not
deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system
determines if a rollover event may be in progress and
whether deployment is appropriate. In the event the
vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event, and
deployment is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will
deploy the side air bags and seat belt pretensioners on
both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions.
This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag
system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact
with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally
heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed signifi-
cantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering,
see your doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irrita-
tion, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for cleaning.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags
work with your seat belt to restrain you properly.
In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
SAFETY 197
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not
be in place to protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the
following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if equipped)
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the inter-
vention of the Enhanced Accident Response System
Unlock the power door locks
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these
other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident
Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC Blower
Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to the
STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key from the
ignition switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment
and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel
tank before resetting the system and starting the engine.
If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle elec-
trical devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the
system by following the procedure described below. If you
have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint
Controller System serviced as well.
6
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 SAFETY
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure
After the event occurs, when the system is active, a message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn the ignition switch from ignition AVV/START or MAR/ON/RUN to
ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting
the system and starting the engine.
Depending on the nature of the event the left and right turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel, may both be blinking and will continue to blink. In order to move your
vehicle to the side of the road, you must follow the system reset procedure.
Customer Action
NOTE:
Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds
Customer Will See
1. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State).
2. Turn ignition MAR/ON/RUN.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
3. Turn right turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
4. Place turn signal in neutral state.
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light BLINKS.
5. Turn left turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is ON SOLID.
6. Place turn signal in neutral state.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
7. Turn right turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
SAFETY 199
If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60 seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the reset procedure must be performed again in order to be successful.
8. Place turn signal in neutral state.
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light BLINKS.
9. Turn left turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light is ON SOLID.
10. Turn left turn signal switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State).
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light is OFF.
11. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK.
12. Turn ignition MAR/ON/RUN. (Entire sequence needs to be completed within one
minute or sequence will need to be repeated).
System is now reset and the engine may be started.
Turn hazard flashers OFF (Manually).
Customer Action
NOTE:
Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds
Customer Will See
6
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 SAFETY
Maintaining Your Air Bag System Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the acceler-
ator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR
under normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of personally identi-
fying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have access
to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured
if the air bag system is not there to protect you.
Do not modify the components or wiring, including
adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering
wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side of
the instrument panel. Do not modify the front fascia/
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag
system service. If your seat, including your trim cover
and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accesso-
ries may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air
bag system for persons with disabilities, contact an
authorized dealer.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
proper restraint for the child’s size.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
SAFETY 201
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call:
1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: https://
www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who have
not reached the height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint,
facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness,
facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child
restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt,
seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
6
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 SAFETY
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It
is recommended for children from birth until they reach
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often
have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by
children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still
less than at least two years old. Children should remain
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their
rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing
in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who are over two years old or who have outgrown
the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing
convertible child seat. Children should remain in a
forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by
the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the
vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the
seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat.
The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the
vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or
remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
SAFETY 203
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat while the child is still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH –
Lower Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower Anchors +
Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
6
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle
anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats.
There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top
tether anchorage located behind the seating position.
These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped
child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no
lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt
must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the
child restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
SAFETY 205
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the
child restraint?
65 lb (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of
the child and the child restraint is 65 lb (29.5 kg). Use the seat
belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the
combined weight is more than 65 lb (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to
attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage
system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if
allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat
owner’s manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner
LATCH lower anchorages from the outboard seating positions?
Yes
You can install child restraints with flexible lower anchors in the
center position. The inner anchorages are 16 inches (400 mm)
apart. Do not install child restraints with rigid lower anchors in the
center position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower
LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the
center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in
an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front
passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if
the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
6
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage
symbols on the seatback. They are just visible
when you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Lower Anchorage Location
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of
the seat.
Tether Anchorage Locations
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped
with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will
have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage
and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage.
Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The
tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is
attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attachments
in the center seating position. Only install this type of child
restraint in the outboard seating positions. Child restraints
with flexible, webbing mounted lower attachments can be
installed in any rear seating position.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See
Ú page 207 to
check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. If you are installing
LATCH-compatible child restraints next to each other,
you must use the seat belt for the center position. You
can then use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s
seat belt for installing child seats in the outboard
positions.
Please see
Ú page 206 for typical installation
instructions.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
SAFETY 207
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages
for that seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or raise the
head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the
rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may
also move the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected
seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to
the top tether anchorage. See
Ú page 209 for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Remove slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used
by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle
the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the
child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the
child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind
the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child
restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat
belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts
are not toys and that they should not play with them.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing
out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract
back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the
retractor.
See the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
Ú page 187 for additional information on ALR.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH
anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
6
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to
attach a forward-facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to
install a forward-facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child
restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt
against the belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an
ALR retractor.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
SAFETY 209
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. If the second row seat can be reclined, you
may recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint
(if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can
be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the
child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the
belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear
a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part
of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing
to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means
the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the
tether strap. See
Ú page 209 for directions to attach
a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage:
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See
Ú page 204 for
the location of approved tether anchorages in your
vehicle.
6
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 SAFETY
(Continued)
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether
anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward
to provide better access to the tether anchorage. If
there is no top tether anchorage for that seating
position, move the child restraint to another position
in the vehicle if one is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat.
If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where
possible, route the tether strap under the head
restraint and between the two posts. If not possible,
lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap
around the outboard side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Rear Seat Tether Anchors
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat
belts.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have
questions regarding the seat belt or retractor conditions,
take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or
authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility for
inspection.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause
serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
SAFETY 211
(Continued)
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first placed in the ON/RUN
position. If the light is either not on during
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. After the bulb check, this light will illuminate with
a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has
been detected. It will stay on until the fault is removed.
If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately
Ú page 180.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See an
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only use
a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of the
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat
that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so
it cannot slip out of position and interfere with the
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe
operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may
cause your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator,
brake, or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle
control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a
regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before installing
any other floor mat. NEVER install or stack
an additional floor mat on top of an
existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your floor
mat interferes with the operation of any pedal, or is not
secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from the
vehicle and place the floor mat in your trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under acceler-
ator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss
of vehicle control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING!
6
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 SAFETY
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the lug nut/bolt torque for tightness. Check the
tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are
suspected, the cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
EXHAUST GAS
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have an authorized dealer inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust
fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle
is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle.
Set the blower at high speed.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all
side windows fully open.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
213
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located in the
lower center area of the instrument panel.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with an Emergency Stop
Signal (ESS)
Ú page 169.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
When the button is activated, all directional turn signals
will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an
emergency. Push the button a second time to turn off the
Hazard Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it only when your
vehicle is disabled or signaling a safety hazard warning for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers may
wear down your battery.
SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
SOS Mirror
If equipped, the Rearview mirror contains an SOS button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber
Ú page 290.
The SOS button will only function if you are connected
to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network,
which comes as a built in function. Other Uconnect
services will only be operable if your SiriusXM
Guardian™ service is active and you are connected to
an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
7
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SOS Call
1. Press or hold the SOS Call button on the Rearview
Mirror.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there will be
a 10 second delay before the SOS Call system initiates a
call to a SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call connection,
push the SOS call button on the Rearview Mirror or press
the cancellation button on the Device Screen. Termination
of the SOS Call will turn off the green LED light on the
Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located next to the SOS button on the
Rearview Mirror will turn green once a connection to
a SOS operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a SOS
operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit
the following important vehicle information to a SOS
operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a SOS Call
The vehicle brand
The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional assistance is needed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
SOS Call system and the SOS operator, the SOS
operator may be able to open a voice connection
with the vehicle to determine if additional assis-
tance is needed. Once the SOS operator opens a
voice connection with the vehicle’s SOS Call
system, the operator should be able to speak with
you or other vehicle occupants and hear sounds
occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call
system will attempt to remain connected with the
SOS operator until the SOS operator terminates
the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with
important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire
or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or
location), do not wait for voice contact from an Emer-
gency Services Agent. All occupants should exit the
vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s oper-
able network and GPS antennas. You could prevent
operable network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
call. An operable network and GPS signal reception is
required for the SOS Call system to function properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s
electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to
initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that
can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio,
CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s elec-
trical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle.
IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY
REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
DENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to help protect you.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 215
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico
DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not
answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
The Rearview Mirror light located next to the SOS
button will continuously illuminate red.
The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact an
authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device
requires service. Please contact an authorized dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the SOS
Call system operation. These include, but are not limited
to, the following factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or
obstructed
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility
Operator error by the SOS operator
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion
Weather
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber Ú page 290.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) network connection and a GPS signal is
required for the SOS Call system to function properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that can
immediately connect you with help in the event that your
vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to your provided
radio supplement for complete information.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview Mirror
light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service the SOS Call system immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the
air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
malfunction in any part of the system is detected.
If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint
Control system immediately.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
7
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING —
IF EQUIPPED
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or
slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
5. Place the ignition in the OFF position.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For example, if the
driver’s front wheel is being changed, block the
passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked Example
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being lifted or raised.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating
the jack or changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slip-
pery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
WARNING!
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 217
JACK LOCATION/SPARE TIRE STOWAGE
If equipped, the jack and tools are located in the rear
storage compartment, below the spare tire.
NOTE:
Items may vary depending on the trim level.
Jack And Tools Location
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor handle.
Load Floor Handle
Spare Tire Removal
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire, and
remove the spare wheel from the vehicle. The jack
will be found beneath.
Spare Tire Fastener
4. Remove the alignment pin from the middle, rotate the
jack counterclockwise, and lift it from the foam tray.
5. Remove the jack and wheel bolt wrench.
1 — Jack
2 — Alignment Pin
3 — Emergency Funnel
4 — Wheel Bolt Wrench
5 — Screwdriver
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or
replaced immediately.
7
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
Jack Warning Label
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
cap covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench
to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the
vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench
to loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the
wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counter-
clockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
NOTE:
Placement for the front and rear jack locations are critical.
See the following images for proper jacking locations.
Jacking Locations
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and set the transmis-
sion in PARK.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful
of motor traffic.
To ensure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 219
4. Jack lifting points can be identified by a triangular
symbol on the outer rocker panel. Place the jack
underneath the lift area that is closest to the flat tire.
Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the
jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange,
centering the jack saddle inside the cutout in the sill
cladding.
Front Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire.
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
7. Remove the alignment pin from the jack assembly
and thread the pin into the wheel hub to assist in
mounting the spare tire.
8. Mount the spare tire.
Mounting Spare Tire
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
For additional warnings, cautions, and information
about the spare tire, its use, and operation
Ú page 264.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
7
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
9. Install and lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
10. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
11. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern
until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice
Ú page 281. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by an
authorized dealer or at a service station.
12. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel
blocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack
assembly and stow it in the spare tire area.
Secure the assembly using the means provided.
Release the parking brake before driving the vehicle.
Damaged Tire Stowage
13. After 25 miles (40 km), check the wheel bolt torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts
are properly seated against the wheel.
14. Place the jack on the foam tray and open it far
enough so that it is secured. Once placed in position,
rotate it clockwise to lock it in. Replace the alignment
pin in the center hole to lock the jack in place.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
Tire Service Kit. Small punctures up to
1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread can
be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign
objects (e.g., screws or nails) should
not be removed from the tire. Tire
Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to
approximately -4°F (-20°C). This kit will provide a
temporary tire seal, allowing you to drive your vehicle up
to 100 miles (160 km) with a maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is stowed under the load floor behind
the rear seat.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor handle.
Load Floor Handle
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result
in serious injury.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or
replaced immediately.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 221
Tire Service Kit Location
Tire Service Kit And Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Components
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to
this position for air pump operation only.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to
this position to inject the Tire Service Kit
Sealant and to inflate the tire.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button once to
turn the Tire Service Kit on. Push and
release the Power Button again to turn the
Tire Service Kit off.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes overin-
flated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once
the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and prop-
erly discarded.
For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the
Tire Service Kit.
You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,
or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air
Pump and make sure the Mode Select Knob is in the Air
Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting
sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only
intended to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm)
diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
1 — Sealant/Air Hose
2 — Hose Accessories
3 — Mode Select Knob
4 — Pressure Gauge
5 — Deflation Button
6 — Power Switch
7 — Sealant Bottle
8 — Power Plug
7
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning Flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the
ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose to
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat
on the ground. This will provide the best positioning of
the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated
tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as
necessary to place the valve stem in this position
before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK and cycle the ignition
in the OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to
the deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem and
then screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant
Hose onto the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the plug
into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE:
Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) from
the tire.
Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated Tire:
1. Always start the vehicle before turning the
Tire Service Kit on.
2. Ensure the Mode Select Knob is to the
Sealant Mode position.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road
to avoid the danger of being hit when using the
Tire Service Kit.
Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under
the following circumstances:
If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
If the tire has any sidewall damage.
If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
If the wheel has any damage.
If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source.
A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit
to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire
Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of
water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change
clothing as soon as possible, if there is any contact
with clothing.
Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physi-
cian immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach
of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately
with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
WARNING!
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 223
3. After pushing the Power Button, the sealant
(white fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle
through the Sealant Hose and into the tire.
NOTE:
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10
seconds through the Sealant Hose:
1. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire Service Kit
off. Disconnect the Sealant Hose from the valve
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
Reconnect the Sealant Hose to the valve stem.
Check that the Mode Select Knob is in the Sealant
Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power
Button to turn the Tire Service Kit on.
2. Connect the Power Plug to a different 12 Volt power
outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available.
Make sure the vehicle is running before turning the
Tire Service Kit on.
3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to previous use.
Call for assistance.
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the Sealant
Hose:
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant
is no longer flowing through hose (typically
takes 30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant flows
through the Sealant Hose, the Pressure
Gauge can read as high as 70 psi
(4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge will decrease quickly from
approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure
when the Sealant Bottle is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire
immediately after the Sealant Bottle is empty.
Continue to operate the pump and inflate the
tire to the cold tire inflation pressure found on
the tire and loading information label located in the
driver-side door opening. Check the tire pressure by
looking at the Pressure Gauge.
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation Button
to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation
pressure before continuing.
1. Push the Power Button to turn off the Tire
Service Kit.
2. Remove the speed limit label from the Tire
Service Kit and place sticker on the steering
wheel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the
vehicle storage location.
Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and
inflating the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles
(8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of
the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location.
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose, and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to
the deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem, and
then screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant
Hose onto the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into
the vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet.
WARNING!
The Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using the Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph
(80 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure
to follow this warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you. Have the tire checked as soon as possible
at an authorized dealer.
7
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
5. Uncoil the Hose and screw the fitting at the
end of the hose onto the valve stem.
6. Turn the Mode Select Knob and turn to the
Air Mode position.
7. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the
vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button to turn on Tire
Service Kit and inflate the tire to the cold tire
inflation pressure found on the tire and
loading information label located in the
driver-side door opening.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation Button
to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation
pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from
12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in
the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at
the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the steering
wheel after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
NOTE:
When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized
dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
Sealant Bottle Replacement:
1. Unwrap the power cord.
2. Unwrap the hose.
Unwrap The Hose
3. Remove the bottle cover.
Remove The Bottle Cover
4. Rotate the bottle up beyond vertical to release.
Rotate The Bottle Up
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 225
5. Pull the bottle away from the Compressor.
Remove The Bottle
NOTE:
For sealant bottle installation, follow these steps in
reverse order.
The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application use and
needs to be replaced after each use. Always replace
these components immediately at your original equip-
ment vehicle dealer.
Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle prior to the
expiration date (printed on the bottle label) to ensure
optimum operation of the system.
Sealant Bottle Expiration Date Location
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly,
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the
manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater than
12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
7
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery in your vehicle is located in the engine
compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
Positive (+) Battery Post
NOTE:
The positive
(+) battery post is covered with a protective
cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the post.
See the following steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK (P) and turn the ignition to
OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. Pull upward and remove the protective cover over the
positive
(+) battery post.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper cable to
the positive
(+)
post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive
(+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative
(-) end of the jumper cable to
the negative
(-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground. A “ground” is an
exposed metallic/unpainted part of the engine, frame
or chassis, such as an accessory bracket or large bolt.
The ground must be away from the battery and the
fuel injection system.
Jump Starting Label
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury
could result.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 227
(Continued)
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle for a few minutes, and
then start the engine in the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the disconnecting
procedure.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-)
end of the jumper cable
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative
(-) post of the booster
battery.
3. Disconnect the positive
(+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive
(+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+)
jumper cable from the positive
(+) post of the vehicle
with the discharged battery, and reinstall the
protective cap.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle,
you should have the battery and charging system
inspected at an authorized dealer.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel for a
Capless Fuel System. If refueling is necessary, while using
an approved gas can, insert the refueling funnel into the
filler neck opening. Take care to open both flappers with
the funnel to avoid spills.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel door
from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel door
to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel door using
the inside release button. Do not pry on the door.
Fuel Funnel Location
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
(-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use
(i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery
will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in
violation of most state and federal fire regulations
and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to
turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground
while filling.
WARNING!
7
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors. A funnel is
provided to allow emergency refueling with a gas can.
See the following steps for refueling:
1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage area.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel
nozzle.
Inserting Funnel
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper doors
open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to
putting back in the spare tire storage area.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be serviced by
an authorized dealer.
Potential signs of vehicle overheating:
Temperature gauge is at HOT (H)
Strong smell of coolant
White smoke coming from engine or exhaust
Coolant bottle coolant has bubbles present
In the event it is observed that the temperature gauge is
moving towards or close to the HOT (H) position, you can
reduce the potential for overheating by taking the
appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the engine idle speed
while preventing vehicle motion with the brakes.
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supple-
ment to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs, and the gear selector cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following
procedure to temporarily move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Grab the boot material rearward of the gear selector
and pull up to carefully separate the gear selector
bezel and boot assembly from the center console.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the
fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over
and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H” and
you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 229
Gear Selector Bezel
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool down into
the gear selector override access hole (at the right
rear corner of the gear selector assembly), and push
and hold the override release lever down.
Gear Selector Override Access Hole
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL (N) position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the gear selector boot.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. Push and hold the lock button on the gear
selector. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and
REVERSE (R) while gently pressing the accelerator.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL (N) for
more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal
to engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R).
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
Push the ESC OFF button (if necessary), to place the Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial Off” mode,
before rocking the vehicle
Ú page 167. Once the vehicle
has been freed, push the ESC OFF button again to restore
“ESC On” mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping when you
are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel,
no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for
at least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the
risk of clutch or transmission failure during
prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE/SECOND gear and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmis-
sion shifting occurring).
7
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment
manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing devices to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to fascia/
bumper or associated brackets. State and local laws
regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
NOTE:
You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
disabled before towing this vehicle to avoid inadvertent
Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake
feature is enabled or disabled via the customer
programmable features in the Uconnect Settings.
Vehicles with a discharged battery, or total electrical
failure when the Electric Park Brake (EPB) is engaged,
will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the rear wheels
off the ground when moving the vehicle onto a flatbed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode.
Note that the Safehold feature will engage the Electric
Park Brake whenever the driver's door is opened (if the
battery is connected, ignition is ON, transmission is not in
PARK, and brake pedal is released). If you are towing this
vehicle with the ignition in the ON/RUN mode, you must
manually disable the Electric Park Brake each time the
driver's door is opened by pressing the brake pedal and
then releasing the EPB.
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, instructions on
shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK so that
the vehicle can be moved
Ú page 228.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground FWD MODELS 4X4 MODELS
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Rear
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Front OK
NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD ONLY METHOD
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 231
WITHOUT THE KEY FOB
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with
the ignition in the OFF mode. The only approved method of
towing without the key fob is with a flatbed truck. Proper
towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the
vehicle.
FRONT-WHEEL DRIVE (FWD) MODELS —
W
ITH KEY FOB
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with all four
wheels
OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must be
towed with the front wheels
OFF the ground (using a
towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels
raised).
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed. The Electric Park
Brake does not need to be released if all four wheels are
OFF the ground.
4X4 MODELS
FCA US LLC requires towing with all four wheels
OFF the
ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed, or
with one end of the vehicle raised and the opposite end on
a towing dolly.
CAUTION!
Do not use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
Do not use a fascia/bumper mounted clamp-on tow
bar on your vehicle. The fascia/bumper face bar will
be damaged.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the approved
requirements can cause severe engine and/or
transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is
not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the
remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the appoved
requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars
and other equipment designed for this purpose,
following equipment manufacturer's instructions.
Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar
or other towing devices to main structural members
of the vehicle, not to fascia/bumper or associated
brackets.
7
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be
one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the
vehicle. The rear hook will be located on the driver's side
of the vehicle.
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use both of the
front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the
vehicle.
Front Tow Hooks Location
Rear Tow Hook Location
Vehicles With Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, and
subsequently in OFF, without opening the door. During
towing, remember that not having the aid of the power
brakes and the electromechanical power steering will
require greater force when applying the brakes and
steering of the vehicle.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
This feature is a communication network that takes effect
in the event of an impact Ú page 197.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed under certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle
Ú page 200.
WARNING!
Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks.
Tow straps may become disengaged, causing
serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for tow
truck hookup or highway towing. You could damage your
vehicle.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
233
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate in the instrument cluster.
This means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer
tow and extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required”
message is displayed. Have your vehicle serviced as soon
as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
an authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under Instrument Cluster
Display
Ú page 70.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), one year or 350 hours
of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours
of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
NOTE:
The Oil Change Indicator will not illuminate under these
conditions.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level.
Check windshield washer fluid level.
Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irreg-
ular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, and
brake master cylinder reservoir, and fill as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
8
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the Maintenance Plan for the required maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge roller pivot joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and hoses.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions, replace the engine air cleaner filter if necessary.
Mileage Or Time Passed
(Whichever Comes First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. X X X X X X X
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and
boot seals, replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 235
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler pulley,
and replace if necessary.
X
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace the cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
Replace spark plugs.
1
X X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
X X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only; yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage Or Time Passed
(Whichever Comes First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about
your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.
8
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.0L ENGINE
1 — Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap 6 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Engine Oil Fill 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 8 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
5 — Battery
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 237
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end of
the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN
and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 qt (1 L) of oil when the reading is at the low end
of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the high end
of the range marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine
compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the
reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual washer fluid.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid, apply it to a cloth or towel, and wipe clean the
wiper blades; this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, and periodic
maintenance is not required.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents are
flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must
be exercised when filling or working around the washer
solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn
or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large
amounts of water
Ú page 225.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a
booster battery or any other booster source with an
output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the posi-
tive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
8
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure
washer is not recommended.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may
void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
For engine oil selection Ú page 284.
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Approved Engine Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified by the
API. The manufacturer only recommends API trademark
oils.
The API Starburst trademark certifies 0W-20,
0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40 and
5W-40 engine oil.
Synthetic Engine Oils
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils, only
use synthetic API approved engine oils.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the correct
API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
numbers should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the
addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes)
to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used for
replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality Mopar® certified filters
should be used. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter is
unavailable, only use filters that meet or exceed
SAE/USCAR-36 Filter Performance Requirements.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts and
connections however, the pressures generated by these
machines is such that complete protection against
water ingress cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the
knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 239
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 234.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality Mopar® certified filters should be used.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Follow the recommended maintenance intervals as shown
in the Maintenance Schedule in this section.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Loosen the fasteners from the engine air cleaner
filter cover using a suitable tool.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to access the
engine air cleaner filter by rotating at the hinge and
pulling the cover away from the engine.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the housing
assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if significant dirt or debris is
present before replacing the engine air cleaner filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the housing
assembly with the engine air cleaner filter
inspection surface facing downward.
2. Tighten engine air cleaner filter cover fasteners using
a suitable tool.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Fasteners
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the engine air cleaner filter cover lid
screws or damage may result.
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located in your owner’s
information kit, for further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury
or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
8
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-1234yf — If Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a Hydrofluo-
roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with
a low global-warming potential. It is recommended that air
conditioning service be performed by an authorized dealer
using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only the manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter
See an authorized dealer for service.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium-based grease, such
as Mopar® Spray White Lube to ensure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating,
excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release
mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and
lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar® Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge or
soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove
accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, and help
reduce streaking and smearing.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield or rear window.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield or rear window. Make sure that they are not
frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid
damaging the blade. Keep the wiper blade out of contact
with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on
geographical area and frequency of use. If chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots are present, clean the
wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
Windshield Wiper Arm And Blade
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air
conditioning components. Such damage is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may
be damaged.
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 241
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, flip
up the locking tab.
Wiper Locking Assembly
3. Tilt the lower end of the wiper blade away from the
arm and with one finger push the release tab toward
the wiper arm.
Wiper Disengaging
4. Slide the wiper blade down towards the base of the
wiper arm.
5. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm
with one hand and separating the wiper blade from
the wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper
blade down toward the base of the wiper arm and
away from the J hook in the end of the wiper arm).
Removing Wiper From Wiper Arm
6. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm
is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade under the hook on the tip of
the wiper arm with the wiper locking tab open.
3. Insert the receiver bracket on the wiper assembly into
the hook on the tip of the arm through the opening in
the wiper blade under the locking tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper
arm until it is latched (engagement will be
accompanied by an audible click). Fold down the
latch release tab and snap it into its locked position.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
1 — Locking Tab
2 — Wiper
3 — Release Tab
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm J Hook
8
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass
to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the glass
unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first.
Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without
unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the
vehicle.
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm, grab
the bottom end of the wiper blade nearest to wiper
arm with your right hand. With your left hand, hold the
wiper arm as you pull the wiper blade away from the
wiper arm past its stop far enough to unsnap the
wiper blade pivot pin from the receptacle on the end
of the wiper arm.
NOTE:
Resistance will be accompanied by an audible snap.
4. Still holding the bottom end of the wiper blade, move
the wiper blade upward and away from the wiper arm
to disengage.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass
to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the glass
unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first.
Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without
unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the
vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
3 — Wiper Arm Receptacle
4 — Wiper Arm
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 243
(Continued)
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on
the end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of the
wiper arm with one hand, and press the wiper blade
flush with the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the
wiper arm pivot cap back into place.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have
the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is
raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to ensure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can
result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer specifications, should
be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is
in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain Carbon
Monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you
Ú page 210.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn, such materials might be
grass or leaves, and those items that come into
contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or
operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust
system can contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
WARNING!
8
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
COOLING SYSTEM
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant is dirty or rusty in
appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and
refilled with fresh engine coolant. Check the front of the
A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc.
If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose
vertically down the face of the condenser.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the Maintenance Plan for the proper
maintenance intervals
Ú page 234.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information Ú page 284.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci-
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant,
may result in engine damage and may decrease corro-
sion protection. OAT engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Tech-
nology (HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is introduced
into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling
system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled
with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors
or anti-rust products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the
radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of
propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not recom-
mended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact an
authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant
(OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant
(antifreeze) can be used up to 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important to use the
same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The
fan starts automatically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the OFF
mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can
start at any time the ignition is in the ON mode.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 245
Please review these recommendations for using OAT
engine coolant that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032. When adding
engine coolant:
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use
higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if tempera-
tures below −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please
contact an authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution.
The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount
of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact an
authorized dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recommended and
can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and OAT
coolant are mixed in an emergency, have a authorized
dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant will
return to the radiator from the coolant expansion bottle/
recovery tank (if equipped).
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with
your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for
your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in
open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency
assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills
immediately.
Engine Coolant Level
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build-up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci-
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build-up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci-
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
8
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine
coolant should be within the OK range between the
ADD and FULL range on the dipstick.
1. Remove the cap with level dipstick from the engine
coolant bottle.
2. Clean off the coolant from the dipstick.
3. Rest the cap on the opening of the coolant bottle
without tightening the cap.
4. Remove the cap with dipstick and check the coolant
level on the dipstick.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant freeze point or
replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant of this.
As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked
once a month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to maintain
the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard
MS.90032 should be added to the coolant bottle.
Do not overfill.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilometers
of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front
of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of
moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating
on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat
opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter
the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant needs
to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are required, the
cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a minimum
of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) and
distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your
engine which contains aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine cooling performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 234.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when
performing under hood services or immediately if the
Brake Warning Light is illuminated.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid
level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid
reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to
fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be
checked when pads are replaced. However, low fluid level
may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only the manufacturer recommended brake fluid
Ú page 285.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly
a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the
brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking capacity
in an emergency.
WARNING!
Use only the manufacturer recommended brake fluid
Ú page 285. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can
severely damage your brake system and/or impair its
performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your
vehicle is also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 247
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special Additives
It is strongly recommended against using any special
additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmission
Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance
may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do
not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only
exception to this policy is the use of special dyes for
diagnosing fluid leaks in 8-speed transmissions.
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely
affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required; therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immediately to
have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the
vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required.
However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life.
Use only the manufacturer specified transmission fluid
Ú page 285. It is important to maintain the transmission
fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission;
only the approved lubricant should be used.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-
ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause
it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the
chemicals can damage your transmission components.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may
occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer
recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. For fluid specifications
Ú page 285.
8
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
FUSES
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive
current.
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result in
vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
Fuse Location
The fuses are grouped into controllers located in the
engine compartment.
Power Distribution Center/Fuses
The Front Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment. This module contains fuses and
relays. Fuse cavity location are printed on the inside of the
power distribution center cover.
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice
versa. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, transmission system) or steering
system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse element
(blown fuse)
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center cover, it is
important to ensure the cover is properly positioned
and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get
into the power distribution center and possibly result in
an electrical system failure.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 249
Underhood Power Distribution Location
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 – – Spare
F02 – – Spare
F03 – – Spare
8
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F04 30 Amp Tan – Rear Defroster (EBL)*
F05 – – Spare
F06 40 Amp – TTM*
F07 40 Amp – Smart Electric Oil Pump
F08 20 Amp – SLM Feed LT*
F09 30 Amp – Power Feed
F10 20 Amp – SLM Feed RT*
F11 30 Amp –
BCM Feed 3 / (Run/Start & FB Relay and Start/Stop & FB Relay in BCM) / Aux PDC Power
Feed
F12 40 Amp – BSM Pump
F13 40 Amp – BSM Valves
F14 – – Spare
F15 40 Amp – Starter Motor Solenoid Fuse
F16 – – –
F17 40 Amp – HVAC Fan
F18 30 Amp – Brake Vacuum Pump
F19 – 2 Amp Micro Fuse Steering Column Control Module (SCCM)
F20 – 7.5 Amp
Engine Control Module (ECM) / Dual Clutch Transmission Mod (DTCM) /Dual Clutch Shifter
Mod (DCSM) / Rad Fan Coil Relay
F21 – – Spare
F22 – 7.5 Amp AC Compressor
F23 – – Spare
F24 – 7.5 Amp Side Mirrors Defrost
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
* If Equipped
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 251
F25 – 20 Amp LT HID Lamp
F26 – 20 Amp
Lumbar Adjust (Driver Seat Only) / Driver & Pass Front Heater Seat SW / Driver & Pass Rear
Heater Seat SW / BVP RLY Coil
F27 – 25 Amp Engine Control Module (ECM) / Fuel Injectors / Snsr GPF EGT
F28 – 15 Amp LTR Coolant Pump
F29A & B – – Spare
F30 – 20 Amp RT HID Lamp
F31 – 15 Amp Wireless Charging Pad / SW Bank Lower 2 / SW Bank Lower LT & RT / Port UCI 2
F32 – 20 Amp Fuel Injectors / Ignition Coils / Ignition Coil Capacitors
F33 – 10 Amp Relay Coil Power Control Relay *
F34A & B – – Spare
F35 – – Spare
F36 – 10 Amp Port UCI 2 / Mod CVPM
F37 – 10 Amp Surge Solenoid / Surge Solenoid Bypass
F38 – 10 Amp ECM / TCM / AGSM / DCSM / STM / Fuel Pump Relay Coil / SEOP / TCM 8-Speed
F39 – – Spare
F40 – 15 Amp Trans Control Module Feed #1 8-Speed
F41 – – Spare
F42 – 20 Amp Cargo Power Outlet – Ignition power
F43 – – Cargo Power Outlet (Can be replaced with 20 Amp fuse in F42 direct battery power)
F44 – 15 Amp Trans Control Module Feed #2 8-Speed
F45 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F46 – 30 Amp Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) AWD Power
F47 – 30 Amp Front Windshield Defrost*
F48 – – Spare
F49 – – Spare
F50 – 5 Amp Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM) ECU Power
F51 – – Spare
F52 – 5 Amp Automatic Gearbox Shifter Module (AGSM) / Dual Clutch Shifter Mod (DCSM)
F53 – – Spare
F54 – – Spare
F55 – – Spare
F56 – – Spare
F57 – 20 Amp RR Power Outlet (12 Volt APO)
F58 – – Spare
F59 – – Spare
F60 – – Spare
F61 – 20 Amp Fuel Pump
F62 – 5 Amp Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
F63 – – Spare
F64 – 10 Amp MOD DCSD / Handsfree Liftgate / UCI + USB Port / HRLS
F65 – 20 Amp Horn
F66 – 20 Amp Cigar Lighter*
F67 – 10 Amp Engine Control Module (ECM)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
* If Equipped
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 253
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is located on the driver’s side under the instrument panel lower cover.
Cavity Blade Fuse Description
*If Equipped
F31 7.5 Amp Brown Occupant Restraint Controller
F33 20 Amp Yellow Window Motor Passenger
F34 20 Amp Yellow Window Motor Driver
F36 20 Amp Yellow
Intrusion Module/Siren, Radio, UCI/USB Port, VSU, Climate Control, Electronic Steering
Lock, Power Folding Mirrors, Security Gateway/DTV
F37 10 Amp Red Instrument Panel Cluster, Drivetrain Control Module, Adaptive Cruise, ECC (HVAC) Blower
F38 20 Amp Yellow Door Lock/Unlock, Liftgate Release
F42 7.5 Amp Brown Brake System Module, Electric Power Steering
F43 20 Amp Yellow Washer Pump Front And Rear
F47 20 Amp Yellow Rear Left Window Lifter
F48 20 Amp Yellow Rear Right Window Lifter
F49 7.5 Amp Brown
Park Assist, Blind Spot, Voltage Stabilizer, Humidity Sensor, Electronic Steering Lock,
Temp Sense, Mirror, Heated Seats, Light And Rain Sensor, Start Stop Switch
F50 7.5 Amp Brown Occupant Restraint Controller
F51 7.5 Amp Brown
Electronic Climate Control, Occupant Classification, Rear View Camera, Climate Control,
Headlamp Leveling, Terrain Select, Heated Rear Window, Trailer Tow, Haptic Lane Mod
F53 7.5 Amp Brown Keyless Ignition Node Module, Electric Park Brake, RF Hub, Cluster
F94 15 Amp Blue Lumbar Adjust Driver Seat, Power Outlets
8
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit -If
Equipped
To access the fuses, remove the storage bin from the left
rear panel of the rear cargo area.
Rear Fuse Box Location
The fuses may be contained in two units. Fuse Holder No.
1 is located closest to the rear of the vehicle and Fuse
Holder No. 2 (If equipped with trailer towing) is located
closest to the front of the vehicle.
NOTE:
The fuse may be contained in an In-line Fuse holder
(If equipped with a Sunroof or Power Inverter Module).
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 255
Rear Cargo Fuse Cavities
2 — Fuse Holder No. 2
1 — Fuse Holder No. 1
8
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Fuse Holder No. 2
Fuse Holder No. 1
On the Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit bracket, there is a Maxi Fuse Holder for the Power Liftgate and an ATO / Uni Val Fuse Holder for the HIFI Audio System.
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F1 10 Amp Red TTM IGN Feed *
F5 15 Amp Blue Controller Exterior Lighting Lights (Driver’s Side) *
F6 15 Amp Blue Controller Exterior Lighting Lights (Passenger Side) *
F7 10 Amp Red TTM Jumper Battery Feed *
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F2 30 Amp Green Memory Seat
F3 20 Amp Yellow Sunroof*
F4 30 Amp Green Power Seat (Passenger Side)
F5 30 Amp Green Power Seat (Driver Side)
F6 7.5 Amp Brown Power Lumbar (Power Seats)
F8 20 Amp Yellow Heated Seats*
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 257
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this section includes bulb description and replacement part numbers.
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Cavity Maxi Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 30 Amp Green Power Liftgate*
* If Equipped
Cavity ATO / Uni-Val Fuse Description
F02 25 Amp Clear HIFI Audio System*
Interior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Front Courtesy Light C5W
Front Courtesy Lights (Sun Visors) C5W
Rear Dome Light (Models Without Retractable Roof) C5W
Rear Interior Lights (Models With Retractable Roof) C5W
Interior Lights HT-168
Dome Light (Glove Box) HT-168
8
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Low Beam Headlamps LED
High Beam Headlamps LED
Front Position/Daytime Running Lights (DRL)/Front Directional - Premium LED
Front Direction Indicator & Position Lamps - Base 7442NA
Side Marker Lamp Base:2825
Front Fog Lamps Base: H11LL/ Premium LED
Side Indicators (Side View Mirror) LED
Tail/Brake Lights
Premium Tail Lights: LED
Base Tail Lights: W21/5WLL
Turn Indicators
W21WLL For Premium Tail Lamps
W21/5WLL For Base Tail Lamps
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED
License Plate Lamp LED
Liftgate Lamp Reverse W21WLL
Liftgate Lamp Tail LED
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 259
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Turn Signal Light/Position Lights (Base)
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Open hood.
2. Reach behind headlamp near the radiator.
3. Remove the electrical connectors.
4. For the turn signal bulb, rotate in a counterclockwise
direction and remove the bulb and bulb socket.
Pull the bulb axially to remove it from the socket.
5. Install the bulb and sockets and rotate them
clockwise making sure that it is properly locked.
6. Reconnect the electrical connectors.
7. Close hood.
Front Fog Lights (Base)
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Turn the front wheels completely.
2. Remove the wheel liner.
3. By pushing the electrical connector tab remove the
electrical connector.
4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise, and then replace
the bulb.
Fog Lamp Bulb
5. Insert the new bulb in the socket, making sure the
bulb is locked into place.
6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
7. Reinstall the wheel liner.
Side Indicators
The Side Indicators are LED. See an authorized dealer for
replacement.
Rear Body Side Tail Lamps
Contain the following:
Position lights
Stop lights
Direction indicator
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Using a suitable tool remove fasteners covering the
screws.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector by pushing the
release.
4. Remove the rear body side tail lamp, sliding it away
from the back of the vehicle.
Body Side Tail Lamp
5. Replace the bulb as necessary by turning and
removing the bulb housing.
WARNING!
Carry out the operation of replacing lamps only with the
engine off. Also make sure that the engine is cold, to
avoid the danger of burns.
1 — Rear Body Side Tail Lamp
2 — Ball Stud
8
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Reverse Side of Tail Lamp
6. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is properly locked.
7. Reposition the rear body side lamp assembly on
the car.
8. Reconnect the electrical connector.
9. Reinstall the body side lamp making sure to align the
ball studs.
Body Side Tail Lamp
10. Install fasteners and tighten body side lamp
assembly.
11. Finally close the tailgate.
Reverse Lamps
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Using a suitable tool remove the access panel for
body side lamps, remove liftgate access cover for
liftgate lamps.
Liftgate
3. Disconnect the electrical connector by pushing the
release.
4. Remove bulb and replace making sure it is properly
locked.
5. Reconnect the electrical connector.
6. Reinstall the access panels making sure they are
locked in correctly.
7. Finally close the liftgate.
NOTE:
Refer to an authorized dealer for service.
1 — Direction Indicator Bulb / Stop Lamp Bulb
2 — Electrical Connector
3 — Ball Studs
1 — Rear Body Side Tail Lamp
2 — Ball Stud
1 — Liftgate Access Covers
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 261
3rd Stop Lamp
The CHMSL is LED. See an authorized dealer for
replacement.
License Plate Lights
The License Plate light is LED. See an authorized dealer
for replacement.
Replacing Interior Bulbs
Front Courtesy Light
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Using a suitable tool remove the front courtesy light
assembly.
Front Courtesy Light
2. Release the retainer clips and bulb housing as
shown.
Front Courtesy Bulb Housing
3. Replace the bulbs by pulling straight out of bulb
housing.
Front Courtesy Bulb Housing
4. Insert the new bulbs, making sure that they are
properly locked.
5. Reassemble the bulb housing and courtesy light
housing making sure that they are properly locked.
6. Install the front courtesy light, making sure that it is
properly locked.
Dome Light Vanity Mirror — If Equipped
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Lift the cover of the mirror and pull out the mirror
frame with the mirror light cover attached.
2. Replace the bulb, releasing it from the side contacts,
and then insert the new bulb, making sure that it is
properly locked between the contacts.
Visor
3. Reinstall the visor mirror light cover making sure that
it is properly locked.
4. Finally lower the visor mirror cover to the mirror.
1 — Retaining Clips
2 — Bulb Housing
1 — Visor Mirror Cover
2 — Visor Mirror Light
8
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Dome Light Glove Compartment
To replace the bulb proceed as follows:
1. Open the glove compartment.
2. Place your fingers inside the light assembly, pull the
bulb to replace it.
Bulb Removal/Installation
3. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is properly locked.
Dome Light
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Lower the handle in the direction shown; remove the
dome light.
Grab Handle/Dome Light
2. Replace the bulb by removing it from the side
contacts.
Bulb
3. Insert the new bulb, locking it between the contacts.
4. Reinstall the dome light.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 263
Interior Cargo Lights
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Using thumb with slight pressure – push bulb holder
to the side.
Bulb Holder
2. Fully disengage the bulb holder from the housing.
Bulb Holder
3. Rotate bulb holder to replace bulb.
Bulb
NOTE:
It is recommended to have your bulbs replaced by an
authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Modifications or repair of the electrical system
performed incorrectly and without taking into
account the technical characteristics can cause
malfunctions with the risk of fire.
Halogen lamps contain gas under pressure, in the
event of breakage be careful of the projection of frag-
ments of glass.
Halogen lamps must be handled by touching only the
metallic part. If the transparent bulb is in contact
with the fingers, reduces the intensity of the emitted
light and you can also affect the life of the lamp. In
case of accidental contact, rub the bulb with a cloth
dampened with alcohol and allow to dry.
8
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire
Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding
the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact
spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the
sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 265
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
8
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located
on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will
find it on the inboard side of the tire.
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 267
Tire Terminology And Definitions
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the
3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
Inflation pressure is measured in units of psi (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire.
The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Manufacturer recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original
equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
EXAMPLE:
8
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side
door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
LOADING
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire And Loading Information
Placard
Ú page 134.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross Axle
Weight Ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must
not be exceeded
Ú page 134.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire And Loading Information Placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 269
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will
be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg
(635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
8
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity
for your vehicle. Never overload them.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 271
(Continued)
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability of
the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response
or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judg-
ment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look
properly inflated even when they are underinflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in
overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock.
Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
8
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build-up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or
conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation.
Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as it is not
designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as
the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the
tire inflation pressure is/or below 14 psi (96 kPa).
Once a Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced
immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a
Run Flat tire is changed after being driven under a Run
Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition, please replace the
TPMS sensor as it is not designed to be reused.
NOTE:
TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle on
a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended to drive a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat
mode.
For more information
Ú page 177.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping
Ú page 229.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial
ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other
types of tires.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone.
Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously
when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 273
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced
Ú page 273.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle sched-
uled maintenance is highly recommended.
NOTE:
The Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The
manufacturer strongly recommends using tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed
Ú page 273. Refer to the Tire And
Loading Information Placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall.
For more information relating to the Load Index and Speed
Symbol of a tire
Ú page 264.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or
original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
1 — Tread Wear Indicators
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You
could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
8
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different All Season tires. All Season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use All Season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on
ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when
ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information,
contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in
size and type to the original equipment tires.
Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be
operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked
before using these tire types.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels
may change suspension dimensions and perfor-
mance characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle.
This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to
steering and suspension components. You could
lose control and have a collision resulting in serious
injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with
load ratings approved for your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may
result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 275
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a
spare tire
Ú page 220.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire designated
for temporary emergency use
Ú page 138.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
And Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the
letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
Full-Size Spare — If Equipped
The Full-Size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use Full-Size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original
equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your
Tire And Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side
door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at
the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle.
Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
8
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to
maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and
contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 234.
The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be
corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does
not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Tire Rotation (Forward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well
on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices, and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to
the power transfer unit. Tire rotation schedule should
be followed to balance tire wear.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 277
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than three weeks,
we recommend that you take the following steps to
minimize the drain on your vehicle's battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started
again.
NOTE:
When the vehicle has not been started or driven for at
least 30 days, an “Extended Park Starting Procedure” is
required to start the vehicle
Ú page 90.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make
roads passable in snow and ice and those that are
sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other
seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle.
Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is
operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme
conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim,
and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination, can cause heat
build-up and possible tire failure.
CAUTION!
Before removal of the positive and negative terminals
to the battery, wait at least a minute with ignition switch
in the OFF position and close the driver’s door. When
reconnecting the positive and negative terminals to the
battery be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF position
and the driver’s door is closed.
8
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle
and remember to always wash when the surfaces are
not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium
chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice
or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge
and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
damage to the wheels. Mopar® Wheel Treatment,
Mopar® Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is
recommended, or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic
cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove
the water droplets from the brake components. This
activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and
prevent vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone
breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner
or equivalent is recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only
car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty wheels,
DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or polishing
compounds. They will permanently damage this finish
and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP
AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular
basis; this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 279
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or a mild car
wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use Mopar® Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Use precautions to not scratch the
paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure —
If Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
For tough stains, apply Mopar® Total Clean, or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
For grease stains, apply Mopar® Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
8
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle
to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace the belts
if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work
properly.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar®
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show any
foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more so than
darker colors. The leather is designed for easy cleaning,
and the manufacturer recommends Mopar® total care
leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather
seats as needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have
questions regarding seat belt or retractor conditions,
take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or
authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility
for inspection.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products may not
be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use alcohol and alcohol-based and/or
ketone-based cleaning products to clean leather
upholstery, as damage to the upholstery may result.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
281
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is found on the left front corner of the windshield
and is visible from the outside of the vehicle.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as
standard equipment. In the event power assist is lost for
any reason (for example, repeated brake applications with
the engine off), the brakes will still function. However, the
effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater
than that required with the power system operating.
If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal
capability, the remaining system will still function with
some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be
evident by increased pedal travel during application and
greater pedal force required to slow or stop. In addition, if
the malfunction is caused by an internal leak, as the brake
fluid in the master cylinder drops, the Brake Warning Light
will turn on.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle,
the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a six-sided (hex) deep wall
socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the Brake Warning Light on is
dangerous. A significant decrease in braking
performance or vehicle stability during braking may
occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or will
make your vehicle harder to control. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
100 ft-lb
(135 N·m)
M12 x 1.25 19 mm
9
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/
bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is
fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it halfway).
Torque Pattern
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly tightened.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is
not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see a dealer
immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than
recommended octane number can cause engine failure
and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
2.0L ENGINE
This engine is designed to meet all emission
requirements, and provide satisfactory fuel
economy and performance, when using
unleaded regular gasoline having an octane
rating of 87, as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use
of 91 or higher octane premium gasoline will allow these
engines to operate to optimal performance. This increase
in performance is most noticeable in hot weather or other
heavier load conditions, such as while towing.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner-burning gasoline referred to as “reformulated
gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates
and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions
and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide
improved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result
in personal injury.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should
clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 283
E-85 USAGE IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with higher
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on Compressed
Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system
components. Problems that result from running CNG or
LP are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
M
ANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) IN
G
ASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasolines to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life
and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask the gasoline retailer whether or
not his/her gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in
Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to further
aide in minimizing engine and fuel system
deposits. When available, the usage of TOP
TIER Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and
diaphragm materials.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control system
can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of meth-
anol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or addi-
tives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer
and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
9
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines 13.5 gal 51 L
Engine Oil With Filter
2.0L Engine 5 qt 4.7 L
Cooling System*
2.0L Engine 9 qt 8.6 L
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of the
manufacturer Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil
We recommend using Mopar® API SP/GF-6A Certified SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Engine
Oil which meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-13340.
Equivalent full synthetic 5W-30 API SP engine oil can be used but must have the API
Donut trademark
Ú page 238.
CAUTION!
Failure to use the recommended API SP/GF-6A or equivalent oil can cause engine
damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.
Fuel Selection 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 285
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your
transmission.
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – If Equipped
We recommend using Mopar® Front Axle/PTU Synthetic Axle Lubricant
SAE 75W-90 (API GL-5).
Rear Differential (RDM) – If Equipped
We recommend using Mopar® Rear Axle/RDM Synthetic Axle Lubricant
SAE 75W-90 (API GL-5).
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3.
9
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's
service history. This can often provide a clue to the current
problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
(additional charges may apply). If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for
an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. FCA US LLC’s authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason you are
still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of
the authorized dealer. They want to know if you need
assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact FCA US LLC's Customer
Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC’s customer center
should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Available 24 hours, 7 days a week.
Call 1-800-521-2779 or visit chrysler.rsahelp.com(USA)
Call 1-800-363-4869 or visit fca.roadsideaid.com
(Canada)
Who is Covered
You are covered by Roadside Assistance services if you
are a purchaser for use of the vehicle. Roadside
Assistance services last for five years or 60,000 miles on
the odometer, whichever occurs first, calculated from the
start date of the Basic Limited Warranty, as set forth in
your Warranty Information book.
1
1. Towing services provided through Cross Country Motor Club, Inc.
Medford, MA 02155, except in AK,CA, HI, OR, WI, and WY, where services
are provided by Cross Country Motor Club of California, Inc., Thousand
Oaks, CA 91360.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 287
What to Do
If your vehicle requires jump start assistance, out of gas/
fuel delivery, tire service, lockout service or towing as a
result of a mechanical breakdown, dial toll-free: USA:
1-800-521-2779/Canada: 1-800-363-4869. Provide your
name, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) required for
covered services, license plate number, and your location,
including the telephone number from which you are
calling. Briefly describe the nature of the problem and
answer a few simple questions. You will be given the name
of the service provider and an estimated time of arrival. If
you feel you are in an unsafe situation, please let us know.
With your consent, we will contact local police or safety
authorities.
If Unable to Contact Roadside Assistance
If you are unable to contact Roadside Assistance or
unable to provide a valid Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and you obtain towing services on your own, you may
submit your original receipts from the licensed towing or
service facility, for services rendered within30 days of the
occurrence. Be sure to include your VIN, odometer
mileage at the time of service, and current mailing
address. We will process the claim based on vehicle and
service eligibility. If eligible, we will reimburse you for the
reasonable amount actually paid, based on the usual and
customary charges for that service in the area where they
were provided. FCA US LLC’s determination relating to
reimbursement is final. Correspondence should be
mailed to:
FCA US LLC Customer Assistance
P.O. Box 9145
Medford, MA 02155
Attention Claims Department
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time.
The Roadside Assistance program is subject to restrictions
and conditions of use, which are determined solely by
FCA US LLC.
Flat Tire Service
If you are inconvenienced by a flat tire, we will dispatch a
service provider to use your vehicle’s temporary spare tire
(if equipped) as recommended in your Owner’s Manual.
This is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Out of Gas/Fuel Delivery
Drivers cannot always count on a gas station being
nearby, especially when traveling away from home. We will
dispatch a service provider to deliver a small amount of
fuel (maximum two gallons) to get you to a nearby station.
This service is limited to two occurrences in a 12-month
period.
Battery Jump Assistance
No time is a good time for a depleted battery. With
Roadside Assistance, you do not have to worry about
being stranded. We will dispatch a service provider to
provide you with a battery jump anytime, day or night.
Lockout Service
Whether the keys are locked in your vehicle or frozen locks
are keeping you from getting on your way, help is just a
phone call away. This service is limited to providing access
to the vehicle’s seating area. It does not cover the cost of
replacement keys.
Towing Service
Our towing service gives you peace of mind and
confidence. If your vehicle becomes disabled as a result of
a mechanical breakdown, Roadside Assistance will
dispatch a towing service to transport your vehicle to the
closest authorized Chrysler, Dodge, Jeep®, or Ram dealer.
If you choose to go to another dealer, you will be
responsible for the cost if the extra distance exceeds
10 miles.
10
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
288 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D.F.
In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan, Puerto Rico, 00919-1857
Phone: (877) 426-5337
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties,
FCA US LLC has installed special Telecommunication
Devices for the Deaf (TDD) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY)
in the United States, can communicate with FCA US LLC by
dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and
for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after FCA US LLC's New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The Mopar® Vehicle Protection plans are the
ONLY vehicle extended protection plans authorized,
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide additional
protection beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you
purchased a Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
If you have any questions about the service contract, call
FCA US LLC’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline
at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call
(800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service contract you
may have purchased from another manufacturer. If you
require service after the FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle
components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects, or other reproductive harm.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 289
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provisions
of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and
market. Refer to www.mopar.com/om for further
information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provisions
of FCA Canada Inc. warranties applicable to this vehicle
and market. Refer to www.owners.mopar.ca/en/ for
further information.
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories and
factory filled fluids are available from an authorized
dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle to keep it
operating at its best and maintain its original condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer, or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to
http://www.safercar.gov
; or write
to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from
http://
www.safercar.gov
.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
10
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289
290 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/
or components and is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These manuals make it
easy to find and fix problems on computer-controlled
vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems, using step-by-step
troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven
diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and
equipment.
To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic
Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific FCA vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or www.owners.mopar.ca
(Canada).
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through Archway at:
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS
*If you have purchased this vehicle used or have changed
your address, please provide the following information
and mail to:
FCA US LLC
P.O. Box 21–8008
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Make sure to include the following:
Date of Sale (mm/dd/yy)
Vehicle Indentification Number (17 Character ID
located on top left of the instrument panel)
Exact Odometer Reading
First and Last Name
Phone Number
Street Address, City, State and Zip Code
Email Address
*Applies to US residents only.
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes
dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290
291
INDEX
A
Active Lane Management System .............................. 128
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)..................................... 104
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............................ 244
Additives, Fuel .............................................................. 283
Air Bag........................................................................... 189
Air Bag Operation.................................................... 190
Air Bag Warning Light ....................................188
, 190
Driver Knee Air Bag ................................................ 194
Enhanced Accident Response ...................... 197
, 232
Event Data Recorder (EDR).................................... 232
Front Air Bag ........................................................... 190
If Deployment Occurs ............................................. 196
Knee Impact Bolsters............................................. 194
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .......................... 200
Maintenance........................................................... 200
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ......................... 189
Side Air Bags........................................................... 194
Transporting Pets.................................................... 210
Air Bag Light ........................................................ 188
, 211
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)........... 239
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...................................... 239
Air Conditioner Refrigerant.......................................... 239
Air Conditioner System ................................................ 239
Air Conditioning Filter ........................................... 51
, 240
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips.....................................50
Air Filter......................................................................... 239
Air Pressure
Tires ......................................................................... 271
Alarm
Arm The System.........................................................19
Disarm The System ................................................... 20
Security Alarm............................................................ 83
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle.......................................................................... 8
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ............................... 244
, 284
Disposal ...................................................................245
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .....................................165
Anti-Lock Warning Light..................................................83
Arming System
Security Alarm............................................................ 19
Assist, Hill Start.............................................................170
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................................144
Auto Down Power Windows............................................56
Auto Hold......................................................................... 94
Automatic Dimming Mirror.............................................33
Automatic Door Locks ....................................................23
Automatic Headlights .....................................................40
Automatic High Beams................................................... 39
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .......................... 50
Automatic Transaxle.......................................................95
Automatic Transmission................................................. 96
Adding Fluid ................................................... 247
, 285
Fluid And Filter Change...........................................247
Fluid Change............................................................247
Fluid Level Check ....................................................247
Fluid Type....................................................... 247
, 285
Special Additives .....................................................247
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode ................. 23
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ...................... 53
Axle Fluid....................................................................... 285
Axle Lubrication ............................................................ 285
B
Base / Midline Instrument Cluster
b
.......................... 68
Battery.................................................................... 82
, 237
Charging System Light.............................................. 82
Keyless Key Fob Replacement................................. 14
Battery Saver Feature .................................................... 80
Belts, Seat..................................................................... 210
Blind Spot Monitoring ..................................................171
Body Mechanism Lubrication...................................... 240
B-Pillar Location ........................................................... 268
Brake Assist System..................................................... 166
Brake Control System, Electronic................................166
Brake Fluid....................................................................285
Brake System ......................................................246
, 281
Anti-Lock (ABS)........................................................281
Fluid Check.....................................................246
, 285
Master Cylinder .......................................................246
Parking....................................................................... 92
Warning Light ............................................................ 81
Brake/Transmission Interlock....................................... 96
Brightness, Interior Lights....................................... 41
, 42
Bulb Replacement........................................................257
Bulbs, Light...................................................................212
11
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291
292
C
Camera, Rear ......................................................131, 132
Capacities, Fuel............................................................ 284
Caps, Filler
Fuel.......................................................................... 134
Oil (Engine).............................................................. 236
Radiator (Coolant Pressure)................................... 245
Car Washes .................................................................. 279
Carbon Monoxide Warning.......................................... 212
Cargo Area Cover ............................................................62
Cargo Load Floor.............................................................62
Cargo Tie-Downs ......................................................62
, 64
Cellular Phone .............................................................. 164
Certification Label........................................................ 134
Change Oil Indicator .......................................................73
Changing A Flat Tire..................................................... 216
Chart, Tire Sizing .......................................................... 265
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light).........89
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ............................... 210
Checks, Safety.............................................................. 210
Child Restraint.............................................................. 200
Child Restraints
Booster Seats.......................................................... 203
Child Seat Installation ............................................ 209
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt................. 207
Infant And Child Restraints.................................... 202
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children.............. 204
Older Children And Child Restraints ...................... 202
Seating Positions.................................................... 203
Child Safety Locks...........................................................23
Clean Air Gasoline........................................................ 282
Cleaning
Wheels..................................................................... 278
Windshield Wiper Blades ....................................... 240
Climate Control ...............................................................45
Automatic................................................................... 45
Manual .......................................................................48
Cold Weather Operation................................................. 91
Compact Spare Tire......................................................275
Connector
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)......................... 52
Console............................................................................ 52
Floor ........................................................................... 52
Contract, Service ..........................................................288
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap)..........................245
Cooling System .............................................................244
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ....................................244
Coolant Level ................................................. 244
, 245
Cooling Capacity......................................................284
Disposal Of Used Coolant .......................................245
Drain, Flush, And Refill............................................244
Inspection ................................................................245
Points To Remember...............................................246
Pressure Cap ...........................................................245
Radiator Cap............................................................245
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ................. 244
, 284
Corrosion Protection.....................................................277
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ....................................104
Cruise Light ..............................................................87
, 88
Customer Assistance....................................................286
Cybersecurity ................................................................144
D
Daytime Running Lights .......................................... 38, 39
Defroster, Windshield...................................................211
Dimmer Switch
Headlight............................................................. 38
, 39
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) .............................................................. 237
Disabled Vehicle Towing .............................................. 230
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)....................................245
Door Ajar ......................................................................... 82
Door Ajar Light................................................................ 82
Driver Memory Seat ....................................................... 25
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt.................................................... 26
Driving ...........................................................................142
E
Easy Entry Seats............................................................. 29
Electric Brake Control System .....................................166
Anti-Lock Brake System.......................................... 165
Traction Control System ................................169
, 171
Electric Parking Brake.................................................... 92
Electrical Power Outlets................................................. 53
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ................................167
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light..................... 82
Emergency Braking ...................................................... 177
Emergency Gas Can Refueling .................................... 227
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher .........................................213
Jacking.....................................................................216
Jump Starting ..........................................................225
Tow Hooks ...............................................................232
Towing...................................................................... 230
Emission Control System Maintenance ........................ 89
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292
293
Engine........................................................................... 236
Air Cleaner............................................................... 239
Break-In Recommendations .....................................92
Checking Oil Level .................................................. 237
Coolant (Antifreeze)................................................ 284
Cooling..................................................................... 244
Exhaust Gas Caution .............................................. 212
Fails To Start ..............................................................91
Flooded, Starting .......................................................91
Fuel Requirements ................................................. 282
Jump Starting.......................................................... 225
Oil.................................................................... 238
, 284
Oil Filler Cap ............................................................ 236
Oil Filter ................................................................... 238
Oil Selection ................................................... 238
, 284
Oil Synthetic ............................................................ 238
Overheating............................................................. 228
Starting.......................................................................90
Enhanced Accident Response Feature .............197
, 232
Ethanol.......................................................................... 282
Exhaust Gas Cautions.................................................. 212
Exhaust System................................................... 212
, 243
Exterior Lighting ..............................................................38
Exterior Lights........................................................ 38
, 212
F
Filters
Air Cleaner............................................................... 239
Air Conditioning................................................ 51
, 240
Engine Oil ................................................................ 238
Engine Oil Disposal................................................. 238
Flashers
Hazard Warning ...................................................... 213
Turn Signals ....................................... 38
, 41, 87, 212
Flash-To-Pass........................................................... 38
, 39
Flat Tire Changing............................................... 264
, 275
Flat Tire Stowage ................................................ 264
, 275
Flooded Engine Starting................................................. 91
Floor Console .................................................................. 52
Fluid Capacities ............................................................284
Fluid Leaks ....................................................................212
Fluid Level Checks
Brake........................................................................246
Engine Oil.................................................................237
Fluid, Brake...................................................................285
Fog Lights.................................................................38
, 40
Fold-Flat Seats................................................................26
Folding Rear Seats .........................................................27
Forward Collision Warning ...........................................175
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle................................................229
Fuel................................................................................282
Additives...................................................................283
Clean Air...................................................................282
Ethanol.....................................................................282
Filler Cap (Gas Cap).................................................134
Gasoline ...................................................................282
Light............................................................................ 84
Materials Added ......................................................283
Methanol..................................................................282
Octane Rating................................................ 282
, 284
Specifications ..........................................................284
Tank Capacity ..........................................................284
Fuses .............................................................................248
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .................................. 35
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap)..............................................134
Gasoline, (Fuel).............................................................282
Gasoline, Clean Air .......................................................282
Gasoline, Reformulated...............................................282
Gear Ranges ................................................................... 97
Gear Selector Override.................................................228
Glass Cleaning.............................................................. 280
Gross Axle Weight Rating............................................. 136
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating .......................................135
GVWR ............................................................................134
H
Hazard Warning Flashers............................................. 213
Head Restraints.............................................................. 30
Head Rests ..................................................................... 30
Headlights....................................................................... 38
Automatic .................................................................. 40
Cleaning...................................................................278
Delay .......................................................................... 40
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ............... 38
, 39
Lights On Reminder ........................................... 38
, 40
Passing ............................................................... 38
, 39
Switch ........................................................................ 38
Time Delay.......................................................... 38
, 40
Heated Mirrors ........................................................ 33
, 35
Heated Seats.................................................................. 29
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch........... 39
Highway Assist System ................................................114
Hill Descent Control .....................................................169
Hill Descent Control Indicator...................................... 169
Hill Start Assist ............................................................. 170
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener).................................. 35
Hood Prop ....................................................................... 59
Hood Release ................................................................. 59
11
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293
294
I
Ignition.............................................................................16
Switch .........................................................................16
Inside Rearview Mirror.......................................... 33
, 213
Instrument Cluster ..............................66
, 68, 69, 70, 73
Audio...........................................................................77
Descriptions ........................................................68
, 70
Display........................................................................70
Display And Messages ..............................................73
Driver Assist ...............................................................76
Fuel Economy.............................................................76
Menu Items ................................................................74
Messages ...................................................................77
Settings ......................................................................78
StopStart ....................................................................77
Trip Info ......................................................................77
Vehicle Info.................................................................75
Instrument Cluster Display
Off Road .....................................................................77
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning................................. 280
Interior Appearance Care ............................................ 279
Interior Fuses ............................................................... 253
Interior Lights ..................................................................41
iPod/USB/MP3 Control ..................................................52
J
Jack Location................................................................ 217
Jack Operation ....................................................216
, 218
Jacking And Tire Changing — If Equipped
b
............ 216
Jacking Instructions ..................................................... 218
Jump Starting ............................................................... 225
K
Key Fob
Arm The Alarm ...........................................................19
Disarm The Alarm......................................................20
Programming Additional Key Fobs........................... 15
Remote Keyless Entry...............................................13
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) ......... 14
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ............15
Keyless Enter 'n Go™ .............................................. 13
, 21
Keys.................................................................................13
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals...............................38, 41
Lane Change Assist ................................................. 38
, 41
Lane Management System ..........................................128
LaneSense ......................................................................87
Lap/Shoulder Belts ......................................................182
Latches..........................................................................212
Hood........................................................................... 59
Leaks, Fluid ...................................................................212
Life Of Tires ...................................................................273
Liftgate ............................................................................ 60
Hands-Free ................................................................61
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer.....................................44
Light Bulbs ....................................................................212
Lights.............................................................................212
4WD Lock................................................................... 86
4WD Low.................................................................... 86
Active Speed Limiter Fault........................................ 87
Air Bag..................................................... 81
, 188, 211
Anti Lock Brake System ............................................83
Automatic Headlights................................................ 40
Automatic High Beam ............................................... 88
Battery Charge........................................................... 82
Battery Saver............................................................. 41
Brake Assist Warning.............................................. 168
Brake Warning........................................................... 81
Bulb Replacement ..................................................257
Cruise.................................................................. 87
, 88
Daytime Running................................................ 38
, 39
Dimmer Switch, Headlight................................. 38
, 39
Door Open.................................................................. 82
Drowsiness Detected................................................ 82
Electric Power Steering Fault ................................... 82
Electronic Park Brake ............................................... 83
Electronic Stability Control ....................................... 84
Electronic Throttle Control........................................ 82
Engine Temperature ................................................. 82
Exterior.....................................................................212
Fog ...................................................................... 40
, 87
Forward Collision Warning........................................ 87
Fuel Cutoff ................................................................. 84
Headlight Switch ....................................................... 38
Headlights.................................................................. 38
High Beam.......................................................... 39
, 88
High Beam/Low Beam Select ........................... 38
, 39
Hill Descent Control .................................................. 88
Hill Descent Control Indicator ................................169
Hood Open................................................................. 82
Illuminated Entry....................................................... 43
Immobilizer Fail VPS Electrical Alarm...................... 87
Instrument Cluster .................................................... 38
Intensity Control................................................. 41
, 42
Interior ....................................................................... 41
LaneSense................................................... 84
, 87, 88
Liftgate Open............................................................. 82
Lights On Reminder ........................................... 38
, 40
Low Coolant Level..................................................... 84
Low Fuel..................................................................... 84
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294
295
Low Washer Fluid ......................................................84
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine)......................84
Oil Pressure................................................................83
Oil Temperature .........................................................83
Park ............................................................................87
Passing ................................................................38
, 39
Seat Belt Reminder ...................................................83
Security Alarm............................................................83
Service..................................................................... 257
Service 4WD...............................................................85
Service Forward Collision Warning...........................85
Service Stop Start......................................................85
Stop Start Active ........................................................87
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS).................... 85
, 177
Towing Hook Breakdown...........................................86
Traction Control ...................................................... 168
Transmission Fault ....................................................83
Transmission Temperature.......................................83
Turn Signals ....................................... 38
, 41, 87, 212
Vanity Mirror...............................................................33
Load Floor, Cargo............................................................62
Loading Vehicle ............................................................ 134
Tires ......................................................................... 268
Locks
Auto Unlock ................................................................23
Child Protection .........................................................23
Power Door.................................................................21
Low Tire Pressure System ........................................... 177
Lubrication, Body ......................................................... 240
Lug Nuts/Bolts ............................................................. 281
Luggage Carrier ...............................................................65
M
Maintenance................................................................... 59
Maintenance Free Battery ...........................................237
Maintenance Schedule ................................................233
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine).................. 84
Manual
Service .....................................................................290
Memory Feature (Memory Seats).................................. 25
Memory Seat................................................................... 25
Memory Settings.............................................................25
Methanol .......................................................................282
Mirrors .............................................................................33
Automatic Dimming................................................... 33
Heated.................................................................33
, 35
Outside................................................................33
, 34
Rearview ...........................................................33
, 213
Vanity.......................................................................... 33
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle.......................................................................... 8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System.....................................177
Mopar Parts ..................................................................289
Multi-Function Control Lever.......................................... 38
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period.......................................... 92
O
Occupant Restraints.....................................................180
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) .......................... 282
, 284
Oil change Reset
b
.......................................................73
Oil Filter, Change ..........................................................238
Oil Filter, Selection........................................................238
Oil Pressure Light............................................................ 83
Oil, Engine............................................................238
, 284
Capacity ...................................................................284
Checking..................................................................237
Dipstick.................................................................... 237
Disposal...................................................................238
Filter.........................................................................238
Filter Disposal..........................................................238
Identification Logo ..................................................238
Materials Added To.................................................238
Pressure Warning Light ............................................ 83
Recommendation...........................................238
, 284
Synthetic..................................................................238
Viscosity...................................................................284
Onboard Diagnostic System .......................................... 88
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual ...................................................... 290
Outlet
Power ......................................................................... 53
Outside Rearview Mirrors ....................................... 33
, 34
Overheating, Engine.....................................................228
P
Paddle Shifters ............................................................... 99
Paint Care .....................................................................277
Parking Brake ................................................................. 92
ParkSense
Front And Rear ........................................................118
ParkSense Active Park Assist...................................... 124
ParkSense System .......................................................118
Pedestrian Warning System ........................................177
Pets ............................................................................... 210
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......................268
11
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295
296
Power
Door Locks .................................................................21
Liftgate .......................................................................60
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .............................53
Sunroof.......................................................................57
Windows .....................................................................56
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts................................ 186
Preparation For Jacking............................................... 216
Pretensioners
Seat Belts................................................................ 187
Profile Settings............................................................. 146
Programmable Features.............................................. 145
R
Radial Ply Tires............................................................. 272
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)......................... 245
Radio
Settings ................................................................... 145
Sound Setting ......................................................... 160
Radio Operation ........................................................... 164
Radio Remote Controls................................................ 164
Rain Sensitive Wiper System .........................................44
Rear Camera ................................................................ 131
Rear Cross Path ........................................................... 174
Rear Seat Reminder Alert............................................ 166
Rear Seats, Folding.........................................................27
Rear Wiper/Washer ........................................................44
Recreational Towing .................................................... 141
Reformulated Gasoline................................................ 282
Refrigerant.................................................................... 240
Release, Hood.................................................................59
Reminder, Lights On................................................ 38
, 40
Reminder, Seat Belt .....................................................181
Remote Control
Starting System .........................................................17
Remote Keyless Entry ....................................................13
Arm The Alarm ...........................................................19
Disarm The Alarm......................................................20
Programming Additional Key Fobs........................... 15
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control.......................164
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode............................................18
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features......... 18
Uconnect Settings .....................................................18
Remote Starting System ................................................17
Replacement Tires........................................................273
Reporting Safety Defects .............................................289
Restraints, Child ...........................................................200
Restraints, Head.............................................................30
Roll Over Warning ............................................................. 8
Roof Type Carrier ............................................................ 65
Rotation, Tires...............................................................276
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle.......................................210
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ....................................212
Safety Defects, Reporting ............................................289
Safety Information, Tire................................................264
Safety Tips.....................................................................210
Safety, Exhaust Gas......................................................212
Schedule, Maintenance ...............................................233
Seat Belt Reminder ........................................................83
Seat Belts.............................................................181
, 210
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ........................................184
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage.................. 184
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage..........184
Child Restraints.......................................................200
Energy Management Feature.................................187
Extender...................................................................186
Front Seat............................................. 181
, 182, 183
Inspection................................................................210
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................................. 183
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................................184
Lap/Shoulder Belts.................................................182
Operating Instructions ............................................ 183
Pregnant Women .................................................... 186
Pretensioners ..........................................................187
Rear Seat.................................................................182
Reminder .................................................................181
Seat Belt Extender ..................................................186
Seat Belt Pretensioner............................................ 187
Untwisting Procedure.............................................. 184
Seat Belts Maintenance .............................................. 280
Seats ............................................................................... 26
Adjustment ................................................................ 26
Easy Entry .................................................................. 29
Head Restraints ........................................................ 30
Heated ....................................................................... 29
Memory...................................................................... 25
Rear Folding ....................................................... 26
, 27
Seatback Release..................................................... 27
Tilting ......................................................................... 26
Ventilated .................................................................. 30
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296
297
Security Alarm ..........................................................19, 83
Arm The System.........................................................19
Disarm The System....................................................20
Security System...............................................................19
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze)................................ 284
Sentry Key (Immobilizer).................................................15
Service Assistance ....................................................... 286
Service Contract........................................................... 288
Service Manuals........................................................... 290
Shift Lever Override ..................................................... 228
Shifting
Automatic Transmission............................................96
Shoulder Belts.............................................................. 182
Side View Mirror Adjustment...................................33
, 34
Signals, Turn............................................ 38
, 41, 87, 212
Snow Tires .................................................................... 274
Spare Tires ................................................................... 275
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline)........................................................ 284
Oil............................................................................. 284
Starting .....................................................................17
, 90
Automatic Transmission............................................90
Button.........................................................................16
Cold Weather .............................................................91
Engine Fails To Start..................................................91
Remote.......................................................................17
Starting And Operating ...................................................90
Starting Procedures ........................................................90
Steering
Column Controls ........................................................38
Tilt Column .................................................................24
Wheel, Heated ...........................................................24
Wheel, Tilt...................................................................24
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ................................... 164
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls..... 164
Storage ............................................................................ 52
Storage, Vehicle..............................................................51
Stuck, Freeing...............................................................229
Sun Roof................................................................... 57
, 59
Sun Visor .........................................................................33
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag..................189
Surround View Camera System ...................................132
Sway Control, Trailer.....................................................171
Synthetic Engine Oil......................................................238
System, Remote Starting ...............................................17
T
Telescoping Steering Column ........................................24
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ......................... 50
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ........................................... 62
, 64
Tilt Steering Column .......................................................24
Time Delay
Headlight............................................................. 38
, 40
Tire And Loading Information Placard.........................268
Tire Markings ................................................................264
Tire Safety Information.................................................264
Tire Service Kit..............................................................220
Tire Service Kit — If Equipped
b
................................220
Tires...................................................212
, 271, 275, 276
Aging (Life Of Tires) .................................................273
Air Pressure..............................................................271
Changing ..................................................................216
Compact Spare........................................................275
General Information...................................... 271
, 275
High Speed ..............................................................272
Inflation Pressure ....................................................271
Jacking .....................................................................216
Life Of Tires..............................................................273
Load Capacity ..........................................................268
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).............. 85
, 177
Quality Grading........................................................276
Radial....................................................................... 272
Replacement ...........................................................273
Rotation ...................................................................276
Safety..............................................................264
, 271
Sizes.........................................................................265
Snow Tires ...............................................................274
Spare Tires .............................................................. 275
Spinning...................................................................272
Trailer Towing ..........................................................138
Tread Wear Indicators ............................................273
Wheel Nut Torque ...................................................281
To Open Hood ................................................................. 59
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight.....................................137
Tow Hooks
Emergency...............................................................232
Towing ...........................................................................135
Disabled Vehicle...................................................... 230
Guide........................................................................137
Recreational ............................................................141
Weight...................................................................... 137
Towing Behind A Motorhome ...................................... 141
Traction Control...................................................169
, 171
Traffic Sign Assist System............................................113
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ...........................................171
Trailer Towing ...............................................................135
Minimum Requirements......................................... 138
Tips...........................................................................140
Trailer And Tongue Weight ..................................... 137
Wiring....................................................................... 139
Trailer Towing Guide ....................................................137
Trailer Weight................................................................137
11
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297
298
Transaxle
Automatic ...................................................................95
Operation....................................................................95
Transfer Case
Fluid......................................................................... 285
Transmission ...................................................................96
Automatic ......................................................... 96
, 247
Fluid......................................................................... 285
Maintenance........................................................... 247
Transporting Pets......................................................... 210
Tread Wear Indicators ................................................. 273
Turn Signals.......................................................38
, 41, 87
U
Uconnect
Uconnect Settings......................................................18
Uconnect Settings........................................................ 145
Customer Programmable Features ..........................18
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ........................................ 276
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector ............52
Universal Garage Door Opener (homelink®) —
If Equipped
b
................................................................35
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................................. 184
V
Vanity Mirrors..................................................................33
Vehicle Loading................................................... 134
, 268
Vehicle Maintenance....................................................238
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ................................... 8
Vehicle Security Alarm....................................................19
Vehicle Security System ................................................. 19
Vehicle Settings ............................................................145
Vehicle Storage...............................................................51
Ventilated Seats .............................................................30
Voice Command..............................................................32
Voice Recognition System (VR)......................................32
W
Warnings, Roll Over .......................................................... 8
Warranty Information ...................................................289
Washers, Windshield.............................................43
, 237
Washing Vehicle ...........................................................279
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .........................................278
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim..........................................278
Wind Buffeting ................................................................57
Window Fogging..............................................................51
Windows.......................................................................... 56
Close .......................................................................... 56
Down.......................................................................... 56
Open........................................................................... 56
Power ......................................................................... 56
Up............................................................................... 56
Windshield Defroster ...................................................211
Windshield Washers ............................................. 43
, 237
Fluid .........................................................................237
Windshield Wiper Blades.............................................240
Windshield Wipers.......................................................... 43
Wipers Blade Replacement .........................................240
Wipers, Rain Sensitive ................................................... 44
Wireless Charging Pad ................................................... 54
23_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident
and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention
o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices by the driver while
the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle
is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states
or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep
®
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for
common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (USA), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your
local Jeep
®
brand dealer.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling
1-877-426-5337 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet or
purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal
minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend or use public transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Second Edition
23_MP_OM_EN_USC
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what
steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of
your Jeep
brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly
to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
©2022 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une
marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
owners.mopar.ca
CanadaUSA
mopar.com/om
